JP7340428B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

A pachinko game machine, which is an example of a game machine, includes a storage part that can store game media supplied from a game island installed in a game parlor, a payout device (payout part) that can pay out the game media, A guide passage forming part that forms a guide passage for guiding the game media supplied to the storage part to the payout part, and the storage part and the guide passage forming part are attached to the game frame with screw members. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2003-96050

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the screw members for attaching the storage section and the guide passage forming section to the game frame, the screw members attached inside the game island, etc. come off, and the storage section and the guide passage forming section are formed. If the screw member falls into the dispensing device along with the game media, the game media may not be able to be dispensed properly, the dispensing device may malfunction, or the screw member together with the game media may fall into the dispensing device. There was a problem in that the funds were sometimes paid out.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent screw members from getting mixed into the payout section.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a starting area;
A light emitting means capable of emitting light;
a display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
Effect execution means capable of executing a specific display effect of displaying the specific display and a specific light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on a predetermined condition being satisfied;
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming part having an open top surface and forming a guide passage for guiding game media in the storage part to the payout part;
a screw drop restriction portion provided to cover the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion;
Equipped with
The specific display can be displayed based on the game media paid out from the payout unit entering the starting area,
The screw fall restriction section prevents the game medium that has fallen onto the screw fall restriction section from staying therein, and prevents the screw member that has fallen onto the screw fall restriction section from falling into the guide path forming section. The screw member is formed so as to be able to stay on the restricting portion and to be able to lock a screw member that has fallen onto the screw fall restricting portion, but not to lock a game medium that has fallen onto the screw falling restricting portion. having a hole,
The performance execution means executes the specific light emission performance so that the light emission of the light emission unit becomes recognizable to the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display performance,
The light emitting means performs the specific light emitting effect during a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing and a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect. emits light in a corresponding manner,
It is characterized by
The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
a storage section (for example, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (for example, game balls P);
A payout unit (for example, payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guiding passage forming part (for example, first guiding passage forming part 202) having an open top surface and forming a guiding passage (for example, a first guiding passage or a second guiding passage) for guiding game media in the storage part to the dispensing part. and second guide passage forming part 204),
a cover part (for example, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, a third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part;
Equipped with
The cover part is provided with a predetermined restriction part (for example, the elongated hole 316A) for restricting the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover part from falling into the guide passage forming part. ~316C, concave grooves 326A~326C, and concave portions 336) (see FIGS. 22 and 24),
A plurality of specific restriction parts (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided in the guide passage forming part for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guiding passage forming part to the dispensing part (FIG. 11). , see Figures 12 and 27),
The predetermined restriction section includes a first retention section (for example, the elongated hole 316A) that can retain the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover section. - 316C) and a second retention part (for example, grooves 326A to 326C),
The second retention part is provided at a position closer to the dispensing part (for example, the dispensing device 200) than the first retention part, and is larger than the first retention part (L22B>L21),
moreover,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., pending display and active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A specific display effect that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a part that displays a pending display or an active display in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ) ), and a specific light emitting effect (for example, a flash effect when winning a prize) that causes the light emitting means to emit light;
Equipped with
The effect executing means executes the specific light emitting effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIG. -28, as shown in Figures 40-29(A) to 40-32(H), and 40-49(A) to 40-50(D), before the display of the pending display is completed. The part that lights up the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning a prize),
The rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emitting effect is executed than when the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-24, when the winning flash effect is executed, (If the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning, the percentage of control to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed)
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g. winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g. main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body). lamp 9d);
The first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous period winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous period winning flash effect); A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start timing of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has a brightness of C1 and (The part that blinks at cycle T1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the brightness is C2 and blinks at cycle T2),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner according to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, in FIG. 40-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d flash at a brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. During the period, the part that blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part can be prevented from falling into the guide passage forming part.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (entering the starting area of the game ball) as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2016-105941, identification based on the establishment of the predetermined condition has been performed. In addition to displaying a display (holding display or active display) on the display means, a pre-read notice indicating that the variable display will be controlled in an advantageous state before the start of the variable display is executed for the variable display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. It is possible to do so, and there is one in which a pre-read notice (specific light emission effect) can be executed by causing a light emitting means to emit light. However, in such gaming machines, depending on the timing at which the display of the specific display starts and the timing at which the specific light emission effect starts, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. In view of this, there is a need to provide a gaming machine that allows players to easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., pending display and active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A specific display effect that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a part that displays a pending display or an active display in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ) ), and a specific light emitting effect (for example, a flash effect when winning a prize) that causes the light emitting means to emit light;
Equipped with
The effect executing means executes the specific light emitting effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIG. -28, as shown in Figures 40-29(A) to 40-32(H), and 40-49(A) to 40-50(D), before the display of the pending display is completed. The part that lights up the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning a prize),
The rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emitting effect is executed than when the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-24, when the winning flash effect is executed, (If the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning, the percentage of control to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed)
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g. winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g. main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body). lamp 9d);
The first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous period winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous period winning flash effect); A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start timing of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has a brightness of C1 and (The part that blinks at cycle T1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the brightness is C2 and blinks at cycle T2),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner according to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, in FIG. 40-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d flash at a brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. During the period, the part that blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect In this case, the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous by causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the specific display.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something that you have.

It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view showing the pachinko game machine. It is a left side view showing a pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing a gaming machine frame to which a gaming board is attached. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the pachinko game machine as seen diagonally from behind. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. It is an exploded perspective view showing the attachment structure of the passage formation body to the gaming machine frame. It is an enlarged back view showing the back upper part of the gaming machine frame. (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10(A), (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 10(A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 10(A). (A) is a plan view showing the first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a DD cross-sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line EE in (A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line FF in (A). (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line II in (A), (C) is a sectional view taken along JJ line in (A), and (D) is a plan view showing the third cover body. (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. (A) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming part in which the ball stopper member is in the first state; (B) is a longitudinal sectional view showing the first guide passage forming part in which the ball stopper member is in the second state. FIG. (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is attached, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK in (A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in (B). It is a perspective view showing the state around the ball tank section on the back side of the game frame as seen diagonally from behind. (A) is a plan view showing the vicinity of the ball tank portion on the back side of the game frame, and (B) is a sectional view taken along the line MM in (A). It is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the first guide passage forming part on the back side of the game frame is viewed diagonally from behind. It is a top view which shows the periphery of the 1st guidance path formation part on the back surface of a game frame. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing the rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 21. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 21, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ in FIG. 22 is a sectional view taken along the line RR in FIG. 21. FIG. 22 is a sectional view taken along the line SS in FIG. 21. FIG. (A) shows the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) shows the state when the ball stopper is in the second state. (D) is a sectional view taken along the line UU in (C), showing the retention state of the screw member. FIG. 7 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the movement of the screw member. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 1st guidance path formation part which shows the moving state of the game ball on a cover part. (A) is a schematic back view showing a cover part as a modified example, and (B) is a schematic back view showing a state in which cables are wired to cross the cover part. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the gaming machine in the feature section 053SG. It is a figure showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a figure showing the solder side of the game control board in Example 1. It is a figure showing the mounting surface of the state where the input circuit and the output circuit were mounted on the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing a wiring pattern branched from a data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground area formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a circuit diagram showing a connection mode of low voltage components and high voltage components mounted on the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a figure showing the wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder side of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing a state in which the game control board in Example 1 is housed in a board case. It is a circuit diagram related to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing a wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1 and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface. It is a figure showing an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure showing an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. It is a figure showing the solder side of the game control board in Example 2. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the connection of the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 2. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the connection of the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. It is a circuit diagram concerning connection of a game control microcomputer, an input circuit, and an output circuit in a game control board in Example 2. It is a perspective view showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above the specific electronic component, and (B) is a perspective view from below the specific electronic component. FIG. It is a sectional view showing a state where specific electronic parts are soldered to the game control board in Example 3. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the image display device. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control data holding area, (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning, and (C) is the configuration of the active display buffer. It is a figure which shows an example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of winning random value determination processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. It is a part of a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display pattern and the presence or absence of execution of the pending display notice effect as a pre-read notice. It is a part of a flowchart which shows an example of a specific display display start effect execution process. It is a diagram showing a performance mode of a specific display display start performance A. It is a figure which shows the performance mode of specific display display start performance B. It is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process. It is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing presentation modes of a flash effect at the time of winning in the first period and a flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. (A) is a front view of the pachinko game machine with the game effect lamp lit at high brightness (C1), and (B) is a front view of the pachinko game machine with the game effect lamp turned off. be. A front view of the pachinko gaming machine in a state where the game effect lamp is lit at low brightness (C2) and a pachinko game machine showing the transition of the light emission mode of the game effect lamp when the game effect lamp is lit at low brightness. FIG. When a starting winning that is eligible for the winning flash effect occurs, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, the lighting of the winning flash lamp, the game effect lamp, and the starting gate lamp, and the timing of displaying the effect image and silhouette image. FIG. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. In the case of a starting winning that is subject to the winning flash effect in the modified example, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, the lighting of the winning flash lamp, the game effect lamp, and the starting gate lamp, and the display of the effect image and silhouette image. 3 is a timing chart showing the timing of . It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a timing chart showing the timing of the lighting of the winning flash lamp, the game effect lamp, and the starting port lamp, the display of the effect image and the silhouette image, and the operation of the movable body in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. It is a timing chart showing the timing of displaying a flash lamp and a silhouette image at the time of winning in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. They are a timing chart showing the timing of the operation of the winning flash lamp and the movable body in a modified example, and a diagram showing the determination ratio of the timing at which the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp changes. It is a figure which shows the display mode of a hold display and an active display in a modification, the suggestion content of each display mode, and the selection ratio at the time of the winning slash effect execution decision. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating presentation modes in a hold display and an active display when a winning flash effect is executed in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating presentation modes in a hold display and an active display when a winning flash effect is executed in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating presentation modes in a hold display and an active display when a winning flash effect is executed in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for implementing a gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained below based on the drawings.

(form)
Type 1 gaming machine is
a storage section (for example, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (for example, game balls P);
A payout unit (for example, payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guiding passage forming part (for example, first guiding passage forming part 202) having an open top surface and forming a guiding passage (for example, a first guiding passage or a second guiding passage) for guiding game media in the storage part to the dispensing part. and second guide passage forming part 204),
It is characterized by having the following.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
A cover part provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part (for example, the cover part 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover part 324 of the second cover body 320, the cover part of the third cover body 330) 334),
The cover part restricts screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover part from falling to the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202). Predetermined limiting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recessed portion 336) are provided for this purpose (see FIGS. 22 and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part can be prevented from falling into the guide passage forming part.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is the gaming machine described in Form 2,
The predetermined restriction portions (for example, the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the grooves 326A to 326C, and the recessed portion 336) are provided so that the game media that has fallen onto the cover portion can fall from above the cover portion without being retained. It is characterized by
According to this feature, the game medium does not stay in the predetermined restriction part, and a state in which the screw member can be retained at all times can be maintained, so that the screw member that falls onto the cover part falls into the guide passage forming part. This can be prevented.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is the gaming machine described in Form 2 or 3,
The predetermined restriction section includes a first retention section (for example, the elongated hole 316A) that can retain the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover section. - 316C) and a second retention part (for example, grooves 326A to 326C),
The second retention part is provided at a position closer to the dispensing part (for example, the dispensing device 200) than the first retention part, and is larger than the first retention part (L22B>L21).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retention part as it approaches the dispensing part, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part from moving and falling into the guide passage forming part.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 4,
The screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen into the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guiding passage forming part 202) are placed in the dispensing part (for example, by the dispensing device). A plurality of specific restriction parts (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided for restricting movement to 200) (see FIGS. 12 and 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide passage forming section from entering the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is the gaming machine described in Form 5,
The specific restriction portion is a plurality of holes (for example, holes 271A to 271H),
At least two or more of the plurality of holes have a size that allows the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming part to fall out of the guiding passage forming part before reaching the dispensing part. (L11>L2, see Figure 11)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if a screw member gets mixed into the guide passage forming part, it can be dropped from the hole to the outside of the guiding passage forming part, so that the screw member mixed inside the guiding passage forming part does not get mixed into the dispensing part. can be prevented. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game medium from being obstructed by the screw member mixed into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is the gaming machine described in Form 6,
The plurality of holes have different sizes,
The largest predetermined hole among the plurality of holes is provided at the position closest to the dispensing section (for example, the left-right dimension L12 of the hole 271H is larger than the left-right dimensions of the other holes 271A to 271G). (See Figure 12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the screw member can be suitably dropped from the predetermined hole to the outside of the guide passage forming part, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming part from getting mixed into the dispensing part. .

The gaming machine of Form 8 is the gaming machine described in Form 6 or 7,
The cover parts (for example, the cover part 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover part 324 of the second cover body 320, the third cover body 330) There is an uncovered area (for example, an uncovered area 350) that is not covered by the cover part 334),
At least some of the plurality of specific restriction parts (for example, holes 271B to 271H) are provided at positions corresponding to the non-covered areas in the guide passage forming part (see FIG. 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the screw member enters the guide passage forming part from the non-covered area, it can be dropped out of the guiding passage forming part through the hole.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 8,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) in which the storage section (for example, the ball tank forming section 201) is provided,
The storage section is
disposed on the upper surface side of a predetermined part (for example, the first protrusion 224) of the game frame,
The screw member is close to or in contact with the upper surface of the predetermined portion so as not to enter between the screw member and the upper surface of the predetermined portion (L30<L1, see FIG. 19(B)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering between the predetermined portion of the game frame and the storage portion and damaging the member.

The gaming machine of Form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 9,
a first board (for example, the main board 11, the effect control board 12, etc.) attached at a position below the guide path forming part (for example, the first guide path forming part 202);
a second board (for example, a terminal board 210) attached at a position above the guide path forming part;
Equipped with
The first board is mounted by a mounting method using screw members, while the second board is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members (for example, the board cases 11A, 12A, etc. are mounted by a mounting method using screw members). While the terminal board 210 is attached to the game board 2 by using a screw member, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 using a locking means consisting of a plurality of restricting parts 235 and a locking part 236 as a mounting means different from a screw member. (See Figure 17)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 11 is the gaming machine according to Form 10,
The second board is an external output board (for example, terminal board 210) to which wiring (for example, cable C) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine is connected;
The first board has a smaller number of connected wires than the external output board (for example, the number of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide path forming part 202 The number of cables C that can be connected to is the first number (for example, 20), while the number of cables C that can be connected to the Each signal line is also connected to the board, but the second number (for example, 10) is smaller than the first number.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the second board, which has a large number of connected wires and is likely to be subject to external force during wiring connection work, cannot be attached with screw members, the screw members may come off due to external force being applied to the external output board. It is possible to prevent it from falling into the guide passage forming section.

The gaming machine of Form 12 is the gaming machine according to Form 10 or 11,
a game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) in which the storage section (for example, the ball tank forming section 201) is provided;
a mounting frame (for example, board mounting frame 211) for mounting the external output board to the game frame;
Equipped with
The mounting frame is characterized in that it has a mounting frame restriction portion (for example, the recess 242) for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen onto the mounting frame toward the guide path forming portion.
According to this feature, by using the mounting frame of the external output board, it is possible to prevent a screw member that has fallen into the guide path forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 12,
The guide passages of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202) are located around the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202). Special restriction parts (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) are provided to restrict falling into the forming part (Fig. 22(C), Fig. 23(A), (B), Fig. 24 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of Form 14 is the gaming machine according to Form 13,
The special restriction section prevents the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage formation section (for example, the first guidance passage formation section 202) to the guidance passage formation section. A special retention part (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can be retained before reaching the attached part, and is provided below the screw member attached to the attached part,
The screw member that has come off from the attached part but does not stay in the special retention part can move toward the cover part (see FIG. 22(C), FIG. 23(A)(B), and FIG. 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member detached from the attached portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of Form 15 is the gaming machine according to Form 13 or 14,
The special retention portion is a recess (for example, recess 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can accommodate at least a portion of the screw member,
The depth of the recess is the depth at which a part of the screw member protrudes when the screw member is accommodated (see FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), 24(B), and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member staying in the recess can be easily taken out.

The gaming machine of Form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 15,
a cover part (for example, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202);
The cover part is provided so as to be inclined downward toward the dispensing part side,
A specific portion (for example, a ball stopper member 340) that can retain a screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion in the cover portion is provided on the dispensing portion side in the inclination direction of the cover portion (see FIG. 15, see Figures 26 and 27)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 17 is the gaming machine according to Form 16,
The specific portion (e.g., ball stopper member 340) sets the guide path forming portion (e.g., first guide path forming portion 202) in a first state in which the game medium (e.g., game ball P) can flow down; It is possible to change to a second state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game medium in the guide passage forming part to flow down (for example, the rotating part 341 is located in the upright position and the front wall part 341A deviates upward from the slit 344). A first state in which the game balls in the first guide path forming part 202 can flow down to the second guide path forming part 204, and a first state in which the rotating part 341 is located at the tilted position and the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344. (It is possible to change into a second state in which the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 cannot flow down (or it is difficult to flow down) into the second guide path forming part 204.) ,
When the specific portion is in the second state, the screw member is more easily retained than when it is in the first state (see FIG. 26).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 18 is the gaming machine according to Form 16 or 17,
The cover part is
A first cover part provided with a retention part (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recessed part 336) capable of retaining a screw member that has fallen onto the cover part ( For example, the cover part 324 of the first cover body 310, the cover part 324 of the second cover body 320),
A second cover part (for example, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330), which is different from the first cover part and is provided with the specific part;
It is characterized by including.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 19 is the gaming machine according to Form 18,
The second cover part (for example, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330) is attached with a screw member (for example, the screw member N16) having a locking part (for example, the flange part F) (FIG. 8). reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 19,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) in which the storage section (for example, the ball tank forming section 201) is provided,
The storage portion is attached to the gaming frame at a plurality of locations by screw members having locking portions (for example, screw members N11 to N14),
The screw members for attaching the storage portion and the guide path forming portion (for example, the first guide path forming portion 202) to the game frame are configured so that they fall outside the guide path forming portion even if they are removed from the game frame. Installed (see Figure 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while the screw member that attaches the storage part is difficult to come off from the game frame, the screw member that attaches the storage part and the guide passage forming part falls outside the guide passage forming part even if it comes off. It is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the passage forming part from getting mixed into the dispensing part.

The gaming machine of Form 21 is the gaming machine according to Form 20,
A plurality of screw members for attaching the storage portion (e.g., ball tank forming portion 201) and the guiding passage forming portion (e.g., first guiding passage forming portion 202) to the gaming frame (e.g., gaming machine frame 3). Among them, a predetermined screw member (for example, screw member N12) near the periphery of the gaming machine is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (for example, ground wire 226) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the number of screw members can be reduced, it is possible to prevent screw members that have fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 22 is the gaming machine according to Form 20 or 21,
The screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) for attaching the storage section (for example, the ball tank forming section 201) to the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are used to reinforce the game frame. Attached to a metal member (for example, metal plate 222) (see FIG. 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the storage section can be firmly attached.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 20 to 22,
The screw members (for example, screw members N3 to N6) attached above the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202) in the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are The present invention is characterized in that the screw member is different from the screw member having the locking portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 24 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 20 to 23,
A game board (for example, game board 2) that can be attached and detached to the game frame (for example, game machine frame 3) is provided,
In the area below the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202) of the game board, there is an inclined surface (for example, above the cover body 220) that allows the falling screw member to flow down. A wall portion 220H) is provided (see FIGS. 18 to 20 and 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen from the guide path forming part to the game board from bouncing back and being mixed into the guide path forming part again.

The gaming machine of Form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 24,
a cover part (for example, the cover part 360 of Modification 1) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202);
The guide passage forming part is
a first passage forming part (e.g., first guide passage forming part 202) extending downwardly toward one side (e.g., left side);
a second passage forming part (e.g., second guide passage forming part 204) extending downward from the lower end of the first passage forming part;
has
The cover part is provided along the first passage forming part so that the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part moves and falls from the lower end to the outside of the guiding passage forming part (FIG. 29). See A))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2 to 25,
A wiring (for example, a cable CH) is provided at a position near the predetermined limiting part (for example, the recess 361) in the cover part (for example, the cover part 360 of Modification 1) so as to intersect with the guide passage forming part. (See Figure 29(B))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is likely to get caught on the wiring and stay in the predetermined restriction portion.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
First, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. In the following description, the direction in which the player is located will be defined as the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction will be defined as the rear. Further, the explanation will be made based on the up, down, right and left directions as seen from a player located in front of the pachinko game machine 1.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired and hit into this game area Y from a predetermined ball launcher. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is rotatably provided on the gaming machine frame 3 around the left side, and the gaming area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or methacrylic resin, and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. It is composed of a panel plate provided with a guide rail 2b (not shown), and a spacer member integrally attached to the back side of the panel plate. The game board 2 is made of a non-transparent material such as a plywood board and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. It may be configured as follows.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the gaming area Y), special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information are variably displayed (also referred to as a special symbol game). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that perform variable display of special symbols may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area Y on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images. Note that a frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2c of the game board 2.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols that are executed synchronously are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). , the first suspension display 25A displays the first suspension storage number based on the number of LEDs lit, and the second suspension display 25B displays the second suspension storage number based on the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, a starting winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the starting winning hole door is in the closed position, so that the second starting winning hole is opened. It becomes a closed state in which game balls do not enter (it is also said that the second starting prize opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state where the game ball can enter the second starting winning port (second It is also said that the starting prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable prize winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces. Further, when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning hole, including the general winning hole, is also referred to as "winning." In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area Y). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area Y, there is provided an out opening (not shown) into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and furthermore, a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area Y. It is being The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward the gaming area Y using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held so as to be supplied to the batted ball firing device ( A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) for storing batted balls is provided. A payout opening is provided below the upper plate from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full. Note that a ball supply tray (lower tray) may be provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area Y by a player's rotational operation on the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state described later (although the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Incidentally, the jackpot type is set in "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc., described later), and the jackpot can be adjusted accordingly. Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", will be returned to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). Incidentally, there is no need for a "small win" to be displayed as a result of the special figure game.

Incidentally, the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, jackpot games during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, jackpot types that make the subsequent gaming state a high probability state) By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board 37 (see Figure 3), an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board 91 (see Figure 3), etc. There is.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

In addition, the CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a first starting prize or a second starting winning, and if there is a winning, the CPU 103 uses random numbers such as for determining the special figure display result, for determining the jackpot type, and for determining the fluctuation pattern. is extracted and stored (stored) in the top of empty entries in the first special figure reservation storage section and the second special figure reservation storage section.

In addition, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to start the special pattern game based on the presence or absence of pending data stored in the first special pattern storage section and the second special pattern storage section, and the special pattern display result. A special system that determines (pre-determines) whether or not the fluctuating display result of a special symbol or performance symbol is a "jackpot" based on numerical data indicating a random value for judgment before the fluctuating display result is derived and displayed. Execute normal symbol processing. In other words, when starting the variable display of the special figure game, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to derive and display the jackpot display result as the display result of the variable display, based on the random number stored when the starting winning occurred. Execute the process of determining (lottery).

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Back structure of pachinko machine)
Next, the back structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 3 to 7. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a left side view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 5 is a plan view showing a gaming machine frame to which a gaming board is attached. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing the pachinko game machine as viewed diagonally from behind. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. Note that illustration of the glass door frame 50 is omitted in FIGS. 5 to 7.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 7, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a game board 2, a game machine frame 3 on which the game board 2 is removably provided, and a game machine frame 3 with the left side of the game machine frame 3 as the center. It has a glass door frame 50 that is provided to be openable and closable in the front of the machine frame 3, and a square frame-shaped outer frame 60 that supports the game machine frame 3 centering on the left side so that it can be opened and closed. By fixing the outer frame 60 to a game island (not shown) installed in the game island, it can be installed on the game island.

At the upper back side of the gaming machine frame 3, a replenishing device 150 (FIGS. 3 and 4 A ball tank forming part 201 forms a storage part capable of storing game balls supplied through the ball tank forming part 201, and a first guiding path is formed to guide the game balls stored in the ball tank forming part 201 toward the left side. A first guide passage forming part 202 and a first passage forming body 203 are provided to extend in the left-right direction along the upper side 3A of the gaming machine frame 3. Furthermore, a terminal board 210, which will be described later, is provided above the first guide path forming section 202.

The replenishment device 150 includes a guiding member 150A that includes a nozzle or the like that can guide game balls in the circulation path of the game island, and a system that sends out a predetermined number (for example, 10, etc.) of game balls guided by the guiding member 150A. A sprocket (not shown) that can drive the sprocket, a drive source (not shown) that drives the sprocket, and a sprocket (not shown) that can be pressed against the gaming machine frame 3 when the opening of the outer frame 60 is in the closed state closed by the gaming machine frame 3. When the lever switch (not shown) is pressed by the gaming machine frame 3 in the closed state, the game ball sent out by the sprocket is transferred to the ball tank forming part 201. When the lever switch (not shown) is not pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the open state, the game ball sent out by the sprocket is held so that it cannot fall. When the number of game balls stored in the ball tank forming section 201 decreases when the outer frame 60 is in the closed state, the sprocket is rotated by the drive source and a predetermined number of game balls are sent out to the ball tank forming section 201. is being supplied to. In addition, in the replenishing device 150, a case body 150B is constructed by assembling a plurality of members using a plurality of screw members (not shown), and the case body 150B is constructed by assembling a plurality of members using a plurality of screw members (not shown). It is fixed at a predetermined location.

In addition, a second guiding passage forming part 204 forms a second guiding passage that guides the game ball guided to the left side by the first guiding passage forming part 202 downward, and a game ball guided by the second guiding passage forming part 204 is provided. A dispensing device 200 forming a dispensing unit capable of dispensing balls, and a dispensing passage for guiding game balls dispensed by the dispensing device 200 to an upper tray, that is, dispensing game balls to a player. In order to discharge the game balls guided by the payout passage forming part 205 and the second guiding passage forming part 204 from the payout device 200 to the payout passage forming part 205 to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1, A second passage forming body 207 comprising a ball extraction passage forming part 206 that forms a ball extraction passage guiding to a discharge part (not shown) provided at the lower part of the back side of the machine 1 is connected to the gaming machine frame 3. It extends in the vertical direction along the left side of the back surface.

The payout device 200 consists of a case body formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and inside includes a sprocket for paying out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, one ball), a payout motor for rotating the sprocket, and a game ball. A switching valve capable of switching the ball flow path between a dispensing passage and a ball extraction passage, an operating lever for switching the switching valve, and the like are provided. Furthermore, a board case 91A in which a power supply board 91 is housed, a board case 37A in which a payout control board 37 is housed, and the like are provided at the lower part of the back of the gaming machine frame 3.

In this embodiment, a ball-out switch (not shown) capable of detecting game balls is provided at a predetermined location in the second guide path, and the CPU 103 receives a detection signal from the ball-out switch (not shown). Based on the input state, it is constantly monitored whether or not there are game balls to be put out in the second guide path on the upstream side of the payout device 200. If the off state of the ball out switch (not shown) continues for a predetermined period of time or more, it is determined that the game balls are not being supplied to the payout device 200 for some reason such as ball jamming, that is, a replenishment error has occurred, and the ball is put out. The dispensing operation by the device 200 is stopped. In addition, by displaying a replenishment error on a predetermined display (not shown) connected to the main board 11 and outputting a replenishment error command to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 can display the glass door frame 50. It is possible to execute notification processing that a replenishment error has occurred by, for example, causing a game effect lamp 9 provided at a predetermined location on the front surface to emit light in an error manner.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 2 is removably disposed in an opening 221 formed in the approximate center of the game machine frame 3 from the front side of the game machine frame 3. The game board 2 includes a plate-like body 2a consisting of the above-mentioned board face plate and spacer members, various game parts (for example, obstacle nails, prize winning devices, etc.) provided on the front side of the plate-like body 2a, and the plate-like body 2a. Electronic components such as the image display device 5 provided on the back side, the production device having the movable body 32, the board case 12A in which the production control board 12 is housed, the board case 11A in which the main board 11 is housed, and plate-shaped The structure includes a cover body 220 that protects the performance device, electronic components, etc.

Note that the board cases 11A, 12A, 91A, and 37A are constructed by a base member made of a transparent synthetic resin material and a cover member so that each board can be stored therein. , are attached to the gaming machine frame 3 or the gaming board 2 by one or more screw members N20, N21 (see FIG. 3), respectively, and the board cases 91A, 37A are attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by locking means (not shown). Or attached to the game board 2. The cover body 220 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material into a box shape with an open front, and a part of the back is an opening/closing part 220A that can be rotated around the right side. The parts can be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, the first passage forming body 203, the second passage forming body 207 provided on the back side of the gaming machine frame 3, and the cover body 220 constituting the back side of the gaming board 2 are When the outer frame 60 is closed by the machine frame 3, it protrudes further rearward than the outer frame 60. In particular, the first passage forming body 203 is provided such that the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming part 201 is located at the rear position of the upper plate of the outer frame 60 at the upper back surface of the gaming machine frame 3. With the outer frame 60 of the game machine 1 fixed to a game island (not shown), game balls can be supplied from the circulation path above the game island to the ball tank forming section 201 via the supply device 150. .

(Mounting structure of first passage forming body 203)
Next, the attachment structure of the first passage forming body 203 to the gaming machine frame 3 will be explained based on FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting structure of the passage forming body to the gaming machine frame. FIG. 9 is an enlarged rear view showing the upper rear side of the gaming machine frame.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the gaming machine frame 3 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with an opening 221 for attaching the gaming board 2. A reinforcing metal plate 222 is provided on the back surface of the upper side portion 3A so as to face in the left-right direction. Furthermore, a mounting member 223 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the gaming machine frame 3 is attached to the back surface of the metal plate 222.

The mounting member 223 is formed of a synthetic resin material so that it can cover the metal plate 222 from the back side, and screw members N1 to N5, which are attached from the back side to a plurality of mounting holes H1 to H5 facing in the front-rear direction, are attached to the metal plate 222. It is attached to the metal plate 222 by screwing into a plurality of formed screw holes, respectively. On the right side of the mounting member 223, a plate-shaped first protrusion 224 is provided to protrude rearward, and on the left side of the mounting member 223, there is a top wall 225A, a rear wall 225B, and left and right side walls 225C. A three-dimensional second protrusion 225 is provided to protrude rearward.

The first protruding part 224 protrudes rearward from a lower position than the upper wall part 225A of the second protruding part 225, and the spherical tank forming part 201 is disposed above the first protruding part 224. Further, the first guide passage forming part 202 is arranged on the rear side of the rear wall part 225B of the second protruding part 225, and a board mounting frame 211 for mounting the terminal board 210 is mounted above it. ing. The board mounting frame 211 is mounted from the back side into the mounting hole H6 formed at the top with the locking piece 212 protruding downward from the lower side inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the attachment member 223 by screwing the screw member N6 into the screw hole formed in the attachment member 223.

In this way, the mounting member 223 is formed to cover the upper side of the game board 2 by having the first protrusion 224 and the second protrusion 225 that protrude rearward. Therefore, game balls and the like supplied to the ball tank forming section 201 from the upper part of the game island are prevented from entering the game board 2. In other words, the mounting member 223 functions as a protective cover for the game board 2.

The first passage forming body 203 has screw members N11 to N14 attached to the plurality of attachment holes H11 to H14 from the back side, and screw members N15 attached to the attachment hole H15 from the upper side. They are attached to the attachment member 223 by being screwed into the respective screw holes. Note that the screw member N12 attached to the attachment hole H12 is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire 226 to the first passage forming body 203 for removing electricity charged in the first passage forming body 203. Moreover, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330, which will be described later, are attached to the upper part of the first passage forming body 203. The third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by screwing the screw member N16 attached from above into the attachment hole H16 into the screw hole formed in the rear wall of the first passage forming body 203. There is.

As shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 8, the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 described above are composed of a male screw portion NS and a head NH. This is a flanged screw with a flange part F as a locking part integrally formed on the seat surface of the screw, and by widening the ground contact area of the seat surface and increasing the frictional force, it is less likely to loosen compared to screw members N3 to N6. It is a screw member.

For example, the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of each screw member N1 to N6, N11 to N16 is approximately 1 to 3 mm, the diameter L2 of the head NH is approximately 4 to 7 mm, and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F is approximately 1 to 3 mm. The length is about 8 to 10 mm longer than the diameter L2.

Incidentally, the sizes and types of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arbitrary, and the dimensions of the diameters L1 to L3 are not limited to the above dimensions. Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16, which are made of flanged screws, are screw members in which a flange portion F (washer) is integrally formed, but instead of the flange portion F, a washer separate from the screw member is used. It may be attached by attaching it to a screw member, and the flange portion F and the washer constitute the locking portion of the present invention. Further, the screw member includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that, when loosened, separates from the attached part. Further, the locking portion includes a locking portion of the head NH that is formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the head NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the first passage forming body 203 needs to receive and store game balls supplied from above the game island in the ball tank forming part 201, and the first guiding passage It is formed in a concave shape with an open top surface so that ball clogging is less likely to occur, and if ball clogging occurs, it can be easily cleared.

In addition, a first cover body 310 and a second cover body 320 cover the upper surface of a portion where game balls stacked in the vertical direction in the ball tank forming portion 201 flow into the first guide path forming portion 202. In addition, a third cover body 330 is disposed to cover the upper surface of the part where the flow flows from the first guide passage forming part 202 to the second guide passage forming part 204, so that the game ball is now rectified. However, although a part of the upper surface opening of the first passage forming body 203 is covered by the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330, the spherical tank forming part 201 and the uncovered area 350 ( (see FIG. 27) is open.

On the other hand, near the periphery of the first passage forming body 203, a plurality of screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arranged to be attached to the gaming machine frame 3 and the attachment member 223. Further, above the pachinko game machine 1 fixed to the game island, there are screw members (not shown) for assembling the frame that constitutes the game island, and various devices arranged inside the game island (for example, A large number of screw members (not shown) for attaching the replenishment device 150, etc. to the frame, etc., and a plurality of screw members for assembling the plurality of members constituting the case bodies of various devices are arranged.

If these screw members loosen and fall out due to vibrations or shocks occurring in the game island or the pachinko game machine 1, they may roll due to the vibrations, shocks, or opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, and the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first There is a possibility that the balls may fall into the interior from the uncovered area 350 of the guide path forming portion 202 and enter the guide path of the game ball. In particular, the replenishing device 150 and the like are arranged directly above and near the ball tank forming section 201 as shown in FIGS. Because this device is prone to vibration when new game balls are supplied from the circulation path or when the game machine frame 3 is opened and closed, screw members ( (not shown) or a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case body 150B of the replenishing device 150 become loose due to vibration and fall off, inside the ball tank forming part 201 or the first guide passage forming part 202. There is a very high possibility that it will fall.

If the screw member falls into the ball tank forming part 201 or the first guide passage forming part 202, it may move toward the payout device 200 side as the game balls flow down, and eventually get mixed into the payout device 200. If the screw member enters the payout device 200 in this way, the sprocket or switching valve may be damaged by the screw member, balls may become clogged and the payout motor may be overloaded and malfunction, or the screw member may be damaged along with the game balls by the player. There is a risk that the player will be paid out, giving the player a sense of discomfort or distrust.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as will be explained below, the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming part 202 may get mixed into the payout device 200 and cause the payout device 200 to be damaged or malfunction, or the screw member may be lost together with the game ball. Various measures have been taken to prevent players from paying out money.

(First passage forming body 203)
Next, the first passage forming body 203 will be explained based on FIGS. 10 to 16. In FIG. 10, (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. 11, (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10(A), (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 10(A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. It is a diagram. In FIG. 12, (A) is a plan view showing the first guide passage forming part, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line DD in (A). In FIG. 13, (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line EE in (A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line FF in (A). In FIG. 14, (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in (A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line H-H in (A). 15, (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line II in (A), (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line J-J in (A), and (D) is a top view showing the third cover body. 3 is a perspective view showing the cover body, and (E) is a perspective view showing the ball stopper member. 16, (A) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming part showing the state where the ball stopper member is in the first state, and (B) is a longitudinal sectional view showing the state where the ball stopper member is in the second state. FIG. 3 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a guide passage forming part.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the first passage forming body 203 is made of a conductive synthetic resin material and has a bottom wall portion 203A and a standing wall portion 203B standing on the periphery of the bottom wall portion 203A. It is formed in the shape of a concave or groove with an opening, and has a spherical tank forming part 201 disposed on the right side and a first guide passage forming part 202 disposed on the left side. The spherical tank forming part 201 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape in plan view, and the first guide passage forming part 202 is connected to an upstream part extending diagonally backward from the left side of the spherical tank forming part 201 and a downstream part extending in the left-right direction. Become. The dimension of the ball tank forming part 201 in the longitudinal direction is longer than the dimension of the first guiding passage forming part 202 in the longitudinal direction, so that it can store more game balls than the first guiding passage forming part 202. has been done. Furthermore, since the bottom wall portion 203A is formed so as to be gradually inclined downward from the left side of the spherical tank forming portion 201 toward the right side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the bottom wall portion 203A is The game balls are designed to naturally flow down the ball tank forming part 201 and the first guide passage forming part 202 toward the left side.

A mounting piece 261 that faces in the vertical direction is protruded from the outer surface of the standing wall part 203B on the right side of the spherical tank forming part 201, and mounting holes H11 and H12 that face in the front-back direction are formed in the mounting piece 261 at the top and bottom. . Further, a mounting piece 265 is provided protruding from the rear side of the mounting piece 261, and a mounting hole H15 facing in the vertical direction is formed in the mounting piece 265. A mounting piece 262 facing in the up-down direction is provided on the outer surface of the left vertical wall part 203B of the first guide passage forming part 202, and a mounting hole H14 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 262. A horizontal wall portion 264 is provided on the outer surface of the upstream wall portion 203B on the front side of the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to protrude forward. A mounting piece 263 is erected on the front side of the horizontal wall portion 264, and a mounting hole H13 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 263.

The first passage forming body 203 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by screwing the plurality of screw members N11 to N15 attached to the attachment holes H11 to H15 into the screw holes formed in the attachment member 223. Further, a recess 280 having a substantially rectangular shape in plan view is formed on the upper surface of the horizontal wall portion 264 near the rear of the mounting piece 263 .

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, holes 270A and 270B are formed at the corners of the bottom wall section 203A and the rear vertical wall section 203B at the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming section 202. (See FIG. 11(A)). A plurality of holes 271A to 271H are formed downstream of the holes 271A and 271B at substantially the center in the front-rear direction of the bottom wall 203A on the downstream side (left side) of the holes 271A and 271B. Furthermore, a communication hole 272 for dropping a game ball into the second guide passage forming part 204 below is formed to penetrate through the bottom wall part 203A of the downstream end of the first guiding passage forming part 202. .

A meandering part 273 is formed in the middle of the first guide passage forming part 202, which causes the game ball to flow down to the left side while meandering in the front-back direction, and among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H, holes 271B to 271F are formed. is formed at a position corresponding to the meandering portion 273. By providing such a meandering portion 273, the ball pressure caused by the following ball is prevented from increasing.

In addition, the distance L10 between the lower portions of the standing walls 203B and 203B before and after the first guide passage forming portion 202 is longer than the diameter 2R (approximately 11 mm) of the game ball, and is twice the diameter 2R (approximately 22 mm). (11mm<L10<22mm). In other words, the first guide passage forming section 202 is formed so as to be able to guide the game balls in one row toward the downstream side.

Since the longitudinal dimension L11 of the holes 271A to 271H excluding the holes 271A and 271B is slightly longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N3 to N6 described above (L11>L2), as will be described later, Even if N6 gets mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw members N3 to N6 can fall from the holes 271A to 271H. In addition, since the hole 271H formed on the most downstream side has the longest left-right dimension L12 (dimension in the downstream direction of the game ball) compared to the other holes 271A to 271G, screw members N3 to N6 are connected to the communication hole 271H. It is possible to reliably make it fall out of the first guide passage forming part 202 before it reaches.

In other words, these holes 271A to 271H constitute a specific restriction part for restricting the movement of the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 to the dispensing device 200. Incidentally, dirt and dust other than the screw members, or some other members can also fall from these plurality of holes 271A to 271H, so that clogging of the ball due to these can be prevented.

(First cover body 310)
As shown in FIGS. 13(A) to 13(C), the first cover body 310 extends along the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B on the front side of the spherical tank forming portion 201, and the upper end of the standing wall portion 203B A mounting part 311 having a downward U-shape in cross section that can be fitted from above to the mounting part 311; a standing wall part 312 extending from the right side of the mounting part 311 toward the rear side; A plate-shaped ball holding part 313 that extends downwardly toward the section 201 side), a cover section 314 that extends from the lower part of the vertical wall section 312 toward the left side (first guide passage forming section 202 side), and It is mainly composed of a plurality of locking parts 315A to 315D that are elastically deformably formed on the front side of the part 311 and the front and rear sides of the cover part 314.

The first cover body 310 configured in this manner has the mounting portion 311 attached to the spherical tank forming portion 201 with the vertical wall portion 312 disposed near the boundary between the spherical tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202. By fitting the upper end of the front wall portion 203B from above, the plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D are elastically locked to a locked portion 317 (see FIG. 18) formed on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B. By doing so, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203. In the attached state, the ball holding part 313 is arranged to cover a part of the downstream side of the ball tank forming part 201 from above, and the cover part 314 covers a part of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming part 202. The cover part 314 is arranged so that the upper surface of the cover part 314 is slightly inclined downward toward the first guide passage forming part 202 (see FIG. 9).

When the first cover body 310 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the ball holding part 313 is arranged on the ball tank forming part 201 side, so that the ball holding part 313 is placed on the ball tank forming part 201 side from the game island (not shown) to the ball tank forming part 201. Even when the supplied game balls are stored so as to be stacked in the vertical direction, when the game balls flow down to the first guide passage forming part 202 side, they are held down by the ball holding part 313 and the flow is rectified. It is now possible to do so.

In the cover portion 314, long holes 316A to 316C extending in the left-right direction and having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view are formed to penetrate vertically and are arranged in a row parallel to each other. Each of the elongated holes 316A to 316C has the same front-to-back dimension L21, which is shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and the heads of the aforementioned screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16. It is shorter than the diameter L2 of NH (L21<2R, L21<L2). That is, the elongated holes 316A to 316C are formed in a size that prevents the game balls and screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 from falling. Note that reinforcing ribs are suspended from the periphery of each of the elongated holes 316A to 316C on the lower surface of the cover portion 314.

In addition, since the long holes 316A to 316C extend along the downward direction of the game ball, the game ball P falls onto the upper part of the long holes 316A to 316C, as shown in FIGS. 13(B) and 13(C). In this case, the game ball P can be moved in the downstream direction (left side).

(Second cover body 320)
As shown in FIGS. 14(A) to 14(C), the second cover body 320 includes a plate-shaped cover portion 324 formed along the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and a cover portion The right end of the cover part 324 is connected to the left end of the cover part 314 of the first cover body 310. The plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B elastically lock onto the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 302B in a state in which the first passage forming body 203 is brought close to each other. mounted on. In the attached state, the cover part 324 covers a part of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming part 202 from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward in the downstream direction of the game ball (Fig. 9 reference).

Concave grooves 326A to 326C extending in the left-right direction are formed on the upper surface of the cover portion 324 and are arranged in a row. The respective grooves 326A to 326C have different longitudinal dimensions L22A to L22C, but are each shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball (L22A to L22C<2R). Note that the longitudinal dimension L22B of the central groove 326B, which has the longest longitudinal dimension, is longer than the diameter L2 of the heads NH of the aforementioned screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 (L22B>L2). That is, the concave groove 326B is formed in a size that cannot accommodate the game balls, but can accommodate the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16. Further, the longitudinal dimension L22B of the groove 326B is longer than the longitudinal dimension L21 of the elongated holes 316A to 316C of the cover portion 314 (L22B>L21).

In addition, the front-rear dimension L22A of the groove 326A and the front-rear dimension L22C of the groove 326C are longer than the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 (L22B>L1, L22C>L1 ), is sized to accommodate at least the male threaded portion NS.

In addition, the grooves 326A to 326C extend along the downward direction of the game ball and are arranged so as to be inclined downward in the downward direction of the game ball, so that the grooves 326A to 326C shown in FIGS. As shown in , when the game ball P falls onto the upper part of the grooves 326A to 326C, the game ball P is guided in the downstream direction (left side).

(Third cover body 330)
As shown in FIG. 15(A) to FIG. 15(C) and FIG. , a plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D that are formed to be elastically deformable on the front and rear sides of the left end of the cover portion 334, and a screw member N15 protruding between the locking portions 335C and 335D on the back surface and attached from above; It mainly consists of a mounting part 331 in which a hole H15 is formed and a ball stopper member 340 provided at the left end of the upper surface of the cover part 334, and the plurality of locking parts 335A to 335D at the left end of the cover part 324 are connected to a vertical wall. At the same time, the threaded member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 is screwed into the threaded hole provided on the outer surface of the vertical wall part 203B. By inserting it, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203. In the attached state, the cover part 334 covers the downstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202 from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward in the downstream direction of the game ball (see FIG. 9).

The cover portion 334 extends obliquely upward from the left side to the right side, and has a recessed portion 336 having a predetermined depth extending from the right end portion of the upper surface toward the left side. A part of the right side approaches the meandering portion 273, and is therefore formed in accordance with the shape of the meandering portion 273. Furthermore, a slit 337 having a horizontally long U-shape in plan view is formed at a position corresponding to the recess 336, thereby forming a rectifying plate 338 whose left end side can be elastically deformed so as to swing in the vertical direction. By forming an inclined plate part 339 that slopes downward toward the right side at the right end part, the game balls P stacked up and down can be leveled while guiding them to be pressed toward the bottom wall part 203A. (See Figure 16).

The longitudinal dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and is also longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 (L23 >2R, L23>L2). That is, the recess 336 is formed in a size that can accommodate the game ball P and the heads NH of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16. Further, the front-to-back dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the front-to-back dimension L22B of the groove 326B of the cover part 324 (L23>L22B).

In addition, since the recess 336 extends along the downward direction of the game ball and is arranged to be inclined downward in the downward direction of the game ball, the recess 336 When the game ball P falls to the top of 336, the game ball P is guided in the downstream direction (left side).

In addition, the front-rear dimension L24 of the slit 337 is shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 (L24<L2), so that ~N16 will not fall from the slit 337.

The ball stopper member 340 includes a plate-shaped front wall portion 341A having a substantially triangular shape in rear view, a rear wall portion 341B disposed on the back side of the front wall portion 341A, and a front wall portion 341A and a rear wall portion 341B. It is composed of a rotating part 341 having a connecting left wall part 341C and a projecting wall part 341D projecting from the upper end of the left wall part 341C, and a cylindrical shaft part 342 facing in the front-rear direction. Bearing parts 343A and 343B that rotatably support the front and rear ends of the shaft part 342 are erected on the left side of the upper surface of the cover part 334. Furthermore, a slit 344 into which the front wall portion 341A can be inserted is formed on the right side of the bearing portion 343A in the cover portion 334.

As shown in FIG. 16, when the third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the upper part of the downstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202 is covered by the cover part 324. Since the cover part 324 is arranged so as to be inclined downward so as to approach the bottom wall part 203A toward the downstream side (left side), the cover part 324 protects the game balls P stacked vertically in the first guide passage forming part 202. The fluid is leveled while flowing down, and finally it is made to flow out one by one from the communication hole 272. In particular, the rectifying plate 338 is elastically deformable when the game balls come into contact with it, so that it smoothes the game balls by pressing them downward to the extent that ball clogging does not occur.

(Ball stopper member 340)
As shown in FIG. 16(A), the ball stopper member 340 is rotatable between an upright position where the rotating portion 341 stands upward and a tilted position where the rotating portion 341 is tilted to the right. is located in the upright position, and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to allow the game balls in the first guide path forming portion 202 to flow down into the second guide path forming portion 204; The part 341 is located in the tilted position, the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 cannot flow down (or cannot flow down) into the second guide path forming part 204. It is possible to change to a second state (difficult), that is, a ball-stopping state.

By setting the ball stopper member 340 in the second state in this way, it is possible to restrict the entry of game balls into the second guide passage forming part 204, so in this state, the game ball inside the second guiding passage forming part 204 can be controlled. It becomes possible to extract the ball and remove the dispensing device 200 for inspection or replacement.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16(A), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating part 341 is opened and consists of a front wall part 341A, a rear wall part 341B, and a left wall part 341C. The space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall in plan view functions as a retention portion in which the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can reside, as will be described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16(B), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the rotating part 341 is tilted, but the projecting wall part 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage. Therefore, as will be described later, the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained on the right side of the projecting wall portion 341D.

(Terminal board 210)
Next, the terminal board 210 will be described based on FIG. 17 and with reference to FIG. 8. In FIG. 17, (A) is a perspective view showing the board mounting frame to which the terminal board is attached, (B) is a KK cross section of (A), and (C) is a LL cross section of (B). .

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 17, the terminal board 210 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and has a cable connection section (not shown) on the back where a signal line cable (not shown) connected to the main board 11 etc. is attached/detached. ) and a mounting member 232 provided with a plurality of connection holes 231 for connecting a plurality of cables C (see FIG. 3) connected to an external device such as a hall computer. Connection pinches (not shown) for pinching the tips of the cables C are provided at positions corresponding to the connection holes 231 inside the mounting member 232. A spring (not shown) is provided to bias the connecting pinch in the direction of closing, that is, in the direction of pinching the tip of the cable C. The mounting member 232 is provided with a plurality of operation parts 233 for opening each connection pinch (not shown) against the biasing force of a spring (not shown).

The number of cables C that can be connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide path forming part 202 is a first number (for example, 20). On the other hand, each signal line is also connected to second boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 provided below the first guide path forming part 202, but the second board, which has a smaller number than the first number, number (for example, 10).

A plurality of operating sections 233 are provided corresponding to each of the connection holes 231, have a substantially hook shape when viewed from the side, and are swung back and forth with the base end thereof as a swiveling axis. When the aforementioned connection pinch (not shown) is released, the connection pinch (not shown) is released by pressing the operation part 233 upward or downward and swinging the operation part 233. Then, when the tip of the cable C is inserted into the connection hole 231 with the connection pinch open and the pressing operation of the operation part 233 is stopped, the connection pinch is closed by the biasing force of a spring (not shown). Cable C is now held. The operating sections 233 arranged in the left-right direction have alternately different shapes in the left-right direction so that when a predetermined operating section 233 is pressed, adjacent operating sections 233 do not interfere with the pressing operation. There is.

The board mounting frame 211 is mounted from the back side into the mounting hole H6 formed at the top with the locking piece 212 protruding downward from the lower side inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the attachment member 223 by screwing the screw member N6 into the screw hole formed in the attachment member 223. Further, the board mounting frame 211 has an opening 234 in the shape of a horizontally long rectangle.

On the inner surface of the board mounting frame 211, there are a plurality of regulating parts 235 that restrict the forward movement of the terminal board 210 by locking on the peripheral edge of the terminal board 210 inserted from the front side, and a plurality of regulating parts 235 that restrict the forward movement of the terminal board 210. A plurality of locking portions 236 that can be elastically locked from the front side to the peripheral edge of the terminal board 210 whose movement is restricted, and a positioning piece 237 that comes into contact with the peripheral edge of the terminal board 210 to determine the arrangement position. have Therefore, the terminal board 210 is inserted from the front side of the board mounting frame 211, and the board is mounted by being elastically locked by the locking part 236 while the forward movement is restricted by the plurality of restriction parts 235. It is attached to the frame 211. In other words, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 using a plurality of restricting parts 235 and locking parts 236 as mounting means different from screw members (by a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members). Installed.

Since the terminal board 210 is formed with a plurality of connection holes 231 to which cables C can be connected, during wiring work to connect a plurality of cables C to the connection holes 231, the operation section 233 corresponding to each cable C is connected to the terminal board 210. need to be operated. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island, when a clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 for inspection etc., the cable C hanging from the top of the game island is connected to the outer frame. 60, tension may be applied to the connection part. In other words, the terminal board 210 is easily subject to load on the mounting portion, and if it is mounted to the board mounting frame 211 or the mounting member 223 using screw members, the thread member may loosen and come off easily. ing.

Furthermore, when the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211, the connection hole 231 and the operation part 233 of the terminal board 210 face the back side through the opening 234 (see FIG. 17(A)). ). Further, since the plurality of operation parts 233 protrude rearward substantially horizontally, the screw members N3 to N6 can be held by the plurality of operation parts 233 arranged side by side on the left and right, as described later. Furthermore, a recess 242 is formed between the lower part of the terminal board 210 and the front part of the board mounting frame 211, in which the screw members N3 to N6 can be accommodated.

(Installation status of screw members N1 to N16)
Next, the mounting state of the screw members N1 to N16 will be explained based on FIGS. 18 to 21. FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing the periphery of the ball tank section on the back side of the game frame as seen diagonally from behind. In FIG. 19, (A) is a plan view showing the vicinity of the ball tank portion on the back side of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in (A). FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back side of the game frame as viewed diagonally from behind. FIG. 21 is a plan view showing the periphery of the first guide path forming section on the back side of the game frame. 22, (A) is a sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing the rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 21. In FIG. 23, (A) is a sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 21, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line QQ in FIG. FIG. 24 is a sectional view taken along the line RR in FIG. 21. FIG. 25 is a sectional view taken along the line SS in FIG. 21. 26, (A) is the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper member is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) is the ball stopper member in the second state. (D) is a sectional view taken along line U-U in (C) when the screw member is in a retained state. FIG. 27 is a longitudinal sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the movement of the screw member. FIG. 28 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming part showing the moving state of the game ball on the cover part.

As shown in FIG. 9, FIG. 18, and FIG. 19(A), screw members N1 to 223 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 are provided at the ball tank forming portion 201 and its surroundings on the back side of the gaming machine frame 3. N2 and screw members N11, N12, and N15 for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the attachment member 223 are attached.

Specifically, the screw members N1 and N2 are attached toward the front from the back side at a position apart from the spherical tank forming part 201 to the right and below the upper edge of the vertical wall part 203B in the spherical tank forming part 201. Therefore, even if the screw members N1 and N2 loosen due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and fall out backwards, there is a very low possibility that they will fall into the ball tank forming part 201 as shown in FIG. .

Because the screw members N11 and N12 are attached to the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the spherical tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the spherical tank forming portion 201, from the back side toward the front. Even if the screw members N11 and N12 loosen and fall out backwards due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of them falling into the ball tank forming part 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

The screw member N15 is attached from the top to the bottom on the outer surface of the right standing wall 203B of the ball tank forming part 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the ball tank forming part 201, so that the pachinko game Even if the screw member N15 becomes loose due to vibration or shock generated in the machine 1 and falls off upward, the possibility of it falling into the spherical tank forming part 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 form a ball tank that receives and stores game balls supplied by the supply device 150 from the circulation path above the game island, and receives the load of a large number of game balls. Since vibrations and shocks are likely to occur due to the arrangement around the portion 201, a flanged screw member is used, which has a large ground contact area with the attached portion and is difficult to loosen.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 around the spherical tank forming part 201 are located at positions where they are unlikely to fall into the spherical tank forming part 201 even if they become loose and fall out, that is, the upper surface opening of the spherical tank forming part 201. Since the balls are disposed lower than the game island, there is no chance that the balls will get mixed into the ball tank forming part 201, which is open at the top to receive and store game balls supplied by the supply device 150 from the circulation path above the game island. suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19(B), the spherical tank forming portion 201 is close to (or may be in contact with) the upper surface side of the plate-shaped first protruding portion 224 that protrudes rearward on the mounting member 223. The gap L30 between the bottom wall portion 203A and the first protrusion 224 is shorter than the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of the threaded member (L30<L1). There is almost no possibility that the screw member will be caught between the wall portion 203A and the first protruding portion 224 and held near the spherical tank forming portion 201.

Moreover, the gap L31 formed between the rear part of the bottom wall part 203A of the spherical tank forming part 201 and the top wall part 220H of the cover body 220 is larger than the head L2 of the flanged screw member and the diameter L3 of the flange part F. Since the flanged screw member is also long (L3>L2), it is almost impossible for the flanged screw member to be caught in the gap L31 and held near the spherical tank forming portion 201.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19(B), if the screw member N15 falls off from the mounting hole H15 as the mounted part and falls onto the upper wall part 220H of the cover body 220, the upper wall part 220H Since the screw member N15 is tilted downward toward the back side, the fallen screw member N15 flows down either to the rear or to the left, so it is almost never held in the vicinity of the spherical tank forming part 201. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fallen screw member N15 from getting into each of the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A provided below the ball tank forming part 201 and coming into contact with the wiring of the board and causing disconnection, etc. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9, 20, and 21(A), screw members N3 to N5 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 and the board A screw member N6 for attaching the mounting frame 211 to the attaching member 223, screw members N13 and N14 for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the attaching member 223, and a third cover body 330 are attached to the first guide passage forming part 202. A screw member N16 for attaching to is attached.

Specifically, the screw members N3 to N6 are separated from the first guide passage forming part 202 to the front side and are directed forward from the back side at a position above the upper end edge of the vertical wall part 203B in the first guide passage forming part 202. In addition, the second protruding portion 225 of the mounting member 223 is disposed between the mounting position of each of the screw members N3 to N6 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the screw member Although there is a certain distance from the mounting position of each of N3 to N6 to the first guide passage forming portion 202, the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 is inclined downward toward the back side, so that the pachinko game machine If the screw members N3 to N6 become loose due to the vibration or shock generated in the first part and fall out backward, they move backward on the upper wall part 225A of the second protruding part 225, as shown in FIG. There is a high possibility that it will fall into the guide passage forming part 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the screw member N3 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position that is spaced forward from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B. It is attached to the mounting hole H3. Further, at a position corresponding to the mounting hole H3 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, a groove 227 is formed in a straight line toward the rear to avoid interference with the head NH when installing the screw member N3 to the mounting hole H3. It has been extended to Note that the groove 227 is formed so that the left and right width tapers toward the rear side and becomes shallower. The bottom surface of 227 is approximately horizontal (or slightly inclined downward toward the back side).

Therefore, if the screw member N3 becomes loose due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and falls off backward, there is a high possibility that it will fall into the groove 227 on the upper wall 225A of the second protrusion 225 (Fig. 22(A)). Further, the screw member N3 that has fallen into the groove 227 is likely to be guided to move linearly toward the rear when vibration or impact occurs, but since the groove 227 is substantially horizontal toward the rear. , the screw member N3 is less likely to move rearward than in areas other than the groove 227. In other words, the groove 227 constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the screw member N3 moving toward the first guide passage forming part 202 from falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202.

Here, all screw members including the screw member N3 are composed of a head NH and a male threaded portion NS, so that when falling onto the upper surface of the flat upper wall portion 225A, the periphery of the head NH and the male threaded portion NS Since the screw member N3 is often tilted with two points in contact with the tip (see Figure 22(A)), the screw member N3 tilted as shown in Figure 22(B) is subject to vibrations and shocks. Sometimes, the head NH rotates and changes its direction around the tip of the male threaded portion NS. Therefore, if it falls onto a flat surface other than the groove 227 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, or if it deviates from the rear end of the groove 227, it may move linearly rearward or the head may fall. The NH may turn to the left or right by shaking its head. That is, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 20, if it moves rearward and curves to the right, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the first cover body 310, and if it moves rearward in a straight line, it will most likely fall on the first cover body 310. There is a high possibility that the object will fall onto the second cover body 320, and if it moves backward and curves to the left, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the horizontal wall section 264 in front of the first guide path.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the screw member N3 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H3 is guided to the rear end of the groove 227 and then moves rearward to bend to the right, the first cover body There is a high possibility that it will fall onto the cover part 314 of 310. As shown in FIG. 22(A), when the screw member N3 falls onto the cover part 314, the screw member N3 is tilted so that the male thread part NS intersects with the long holes 316A to 316C, or the male thread part NS is Although the head NH is inserted into any of the elongated holes 316A to 316C, it is locked without falling off, so that it stays on the cover part 314 without falling from the cover part 314 into the first guide passage forming part 202. I will do it. In other words, the long holes 316A to 316C prevent the screw member N3, which has fallen onto the cover part 314 provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202, from falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a predetermined restriction section for restriction.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the groove 227 is guided to the rear end and then moved linearly toward the rear, the cover part 324 of the second cover body 320 or the first passage There is a high possibility that the object will fall onto the horizontal wall 264 of the body 203. As shown in FIG. 22(C), when the screw member N3 falls onto the cover part 324, the screw member N3 is tilted so that the male thread part NS intersects with the grooves 326A to 326C, or the male thread part NS and Since a part of the head NH is accommodated in the grooves 326A to 326C, it stays on the cover part 324 without falling from the cover part 324 into the first guide passage forming part 202. In other words, the grooves 326A to 326C prevent the screw member N3, which has fallen onto the cover part 324 provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202, from falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a predetermined restriction section for restriction.

In addition, if the second protruding portion 225 falls onto the horizontal wall portion 264 of the first passage forming body 203 provided between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guiding passage forming portion 202, Remains in a tilted state. In other words, the horizontal wall portion 264 side is disposed below the upper end edges of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the upper wall portion 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B, and the horizontal wall portion 264 form a recessed portion 290 that is open at the top, so that it is accommodated and retained within this recessed portion 290. In other words, the recess 290 is provided between the mounting hole H3 around the first guide passage forming part 202 and the first guiding passage forming part 202, and the recess 290 is a screw member that has moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the fall of N3 to the first guide passage forming part 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, in the first passage forming body 203, the screw member N13 is spaced forward from the upstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202 and slightly above the upper edge of the vertical wall part 203B. It is attached to the attachment hole H13 formed in the attachment piece 263, which is the position. Therefore, if the screw member N13 becomes loose due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and falls off backward, there is a possibility that it will fall into the recess 280 formed near the rear side of the mounting hole H13 in the horizontal wall portion 264. high (see FIG. 23(A)). Specifically, the horizontal wall portion 264 is disposed below the upper edges of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B between the mounting piece 263 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the upper wall portion 225A, a recess 280 smaller than the recess 290 is formed in the vicinity of the mounting hole H13 in the recess 290 that is open at the top by the vertical wall 203B and the horizontal wall 264, so that the recess 280 is accommodated and retained in the recess 280. Become.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 23(B), if the screw member N13 loosens and falls off backward due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the screw member N13 located at the lower left side of the horizontal wall portion 264 It may fall and stay in the recess 214 provided near the right side of the board mounting frame 211. In other words, the recess 214 is provided between the mounting hole H13 around the first guide passage forming part 202 and the first guiding passage forming part 202, and the recess 214 is a screw member that has moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the N13 from falling into the first guide passage forming part 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N4 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position that is spaced forward from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B. It is attached to the mounting hole H4. Therefore, if the screw member N4 loosens and falls off backward due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the upper wall 225A of the second protrusion 225 (see FIG. 24).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21, and 24, when the screw member N4 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H4 moves rearward to the right, when it moves rearward in a straight line, when it moves backward In either case, as shown in FIG. 24, when the board mount frame 211 moves to the right, it falls from the top wall 225A and from the rear end of the top wall 211H of the board mounting frame 211. The screw member N4 that has fallen from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H enters the inside through the opening 234 and is accommodated and retained in the recess 242 formed by the board mounting frame 211 and the terminal board 210, or the screw member N4 falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. Although the male threaded portion NS is inserted into the recessed portion 243 formed between the vertical wall portion 211 and the vertical wall portion 203B, there is a possibility that the head portion NH is retained without falling off. In other words, the recess 242 and the recess 243 are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming part 202 and the first guiding passage forming part 202, and are moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the fall of the threaded member N4 to the first guide passage forming part 202.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 24, when the screw member N4 falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H, the screw member N4 may be held on the plurality of operation parts 233. Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island, a plurality of cables C connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 are suspended from the top of the game island (see FIG. 3), so these cables C may prevent the screw member N4 from falling from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. In other words, the operating section 233 and the cable C are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming part 202 and the first guiding passage forming part 202, and are moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202. This constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the screw member N4 from falling into the first guide passage forming part 202.

In addition, if the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves backward and to the right, and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, the first cover body 310, the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the non-covered region 350 provided between the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330, which is not covered by either the second cover body 320 or the third cover body 330. to fall. The screw member N4 that has fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side according to the flow of the game ball P and approaches the bottom wall part 203A, It falls through one of the holes 271B to 271D formed at a position corresponding to the non-covered area 350 in the guide passage forming part 202 and is discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming part 202.

Furthermore, even if it does not fall from any of the holes 271B to 271D, it will eventually fall from any of the holes 271A to 271H and be discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming section 202. In other words, the holes 271A to 271H constitute a specific restriction part for restricting the movement of the screw member N4 that has fallen into the ball tank forming part 201 or the first guide passage forming part 202 to the dispensing device 200.

On the other hand, if the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves rearward to bend to the left and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, the screw member N4 falls onto the recess 336 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330. By falling, it is accommodated and retained in the recess 336 without falling from the cover part 334 into the first guide passage forming part 202. In other words, the recessed portion 336 is designed to restrict the screw member N4 that has fallen onto the cover portion 334 provided to cover a portion of the upper surface of the first guiding path forming portion 202 from falling into the first guiding path forming portion 202. This constitutes a predetermined restriction section.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N6 is formed in the board mounting frame 211 at a position that is spaced forward from the downstream part of the first guide passage forming section 202 and above the upper edge of the vertical wall section 203B. It is attached to the attached attachment hole H6. Therefore, if the screw member N6 becomes loose due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and falls off backward, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 (see FIG. 25).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21, and 25, the screw member N6 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H6 is guided to move linearly rearward by a plurality of ribs 211A extending rearward. After that, when it moves to the right, it falls to a position near the upstream side of the ball stopper member 340 on the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330, as shown in FIG. As described in FIG. 16, the cover part 334 covers the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming part 202 so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream side (dispensing device 200 side). The screw member N6 that has fallen to a position near the upstream side of the ball stopper member 340 in is likely to move toward the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 26, the screw member N6 that has moved to the downstream side contacts the ball stopper member 340 provided at the downstream end (left end) that is the lower inclined side of the cover part 334, and moves downstream ( Since the movement to the left side is restricted, it stays on the cover part 334.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, when the ball stopper member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating part 341 is opened, and the front wall part 341A and the rear wall part 341B are opened. Since the screw member N6 can be retained in the space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall portion in plan view consisting of the left wall portion 341C, the screw member N6 can be held without falling from above the cover portion 334. be able to. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 26(C) and 26(D), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is located in an upright state across the passage, so that the screw member N6 is Since the screw member N6 can be retained on the right side of the portion 341D, the screw member N6 can be held without falling from above the cover portion 334.

In the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is only disposed so as to intersect with the inclination direction, and the front and rear sides are open, so there is a possibility that the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted may fall backward or forward. On the other hand, in the first state, the front and left sides of the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted are covered by the front wall 341A, the rear wall 341B, and the left wall 341C, so the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted is It is possible to retain the liquid more reliably than in the second state in which the left wall portion 341C is located only on the left side. That is, the ball stopper member 340 is provided on the dispensing device 200 side in the oblique direction of the cover part 334, and constitutes a specific part that can retain the screw member N6 that has fallen onto the cover part 334 in the cover part 334. are doing.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N5 is located in the mounting member 223 at a position that is away from the downstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202 to the front and right side and is above the upper edge of the vertical wall part 203B. Although it is attached to the formed attachment hole H5, the first guide passage forming part 202 is not arranged directly behind the attachment hole H5, and the upper wall part 225A of the second protrusion 225 is also cut in the middle. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls off backward, it will fall onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second protrusion 225, but before it reaches the first guide passage forming portion 202. There is a high possibility that it will fall from the upper wall portion 225A to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, the screw member N16 is attached to a mounting hole H16 formed in the third cover body 330 on the rear side of the first guide passage forming section 202 and at a position below the upper end edge of the vertical wall section 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls out backwards, there is a high possibility that it will fall outside the first guiding passage forming part 202 without falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202. .

(action/effect)
As explained above, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. N3 to N6, etc., become loose due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and fall out, and after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A due to vibrations, shocks, or opening/closing of the gaming machine frame 3, the cover is removed. When the ball falls onto the parts 314, 324, and 334, the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the grooves 326A to 326C, the recessed part 336, and the ball stopper member 340 restrict the ball from falling to the first guide passage forming part 202. Screws that have fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 are likely to remain on the cover parts 314, 324, 334 without falling from the cover parts 314, 324, 334 into the first guiding passage forming part 202. It is possible to prevent the members from moving and getting mixed into the dispensing device 200. Furthermore, since vertical walls are formed at the left (downstream side) ends of the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C, even if the screw member moves to the left, it will not flow into the first guide passage forming part 202. can be suitably prevented from falling.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28, on the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202, the area other than the non-covered area 350 is covered with cover parts 314, 324, and 334, but the spherical tank forming part 201 Even if the supplied game ball spills and lands on the upstream side cover parts 314, 324, the front and rear dimensions of the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C are smaller than the diameter 2R of the game ball P. Since the game ball P is also narrow, after rolling toward the left side, the game ball P falls from the left end of the cover part 324 to the non-covered area 350 and is returned into the first guide path forming part 202.

Therefore, not only can the game balls that have ridden on the cover parts 314 and 324 be returned to the first guide passage forming part 202, but also the game balls P can stay in the long holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C. As a result, the space in which the fallen screw member N stays is limited, or it comes into contact with the staying game balls and falls from the non-covered area 350 into the first guide path forming part 202. This can be prevented.

In addition, when a game ball falls onto the cover part 334, it either flows down on the cover part 334 toward the left side and is regulated by the ball stopper member 340, or falls outside the first guide path forming part 202. do.

Further, in the long holes 316A to 316C as the first retention part and the grooves 326A to 326C as the second retention part, the groove 326B is provided at a position closer to the dispensing device 200 than the long holes 316A to 316C, The longitudinal dimension L22B is larger than the longitudinal dimension L22 of the long hole 316B (L22B>L21). By doing this, as the screw member approaches the dispensing device 200, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retention part, so the screw member that has fallen onto the cover parts 314, 324 moves and falls into the first guide passage forming part 202. This can be prevented.

On the other hand, the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen and remained on the cover parts 314, 324, and 334 are moved due to vibrations, impacts, etc. When falling from the area 350 into the first guide passage forming part 202, or after moving backward on the upper wall part 225A like the screw member N4, the first guide passage forming part 202 from the uncovered area 350 Even if the game ball P falls directly inside, it falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side according to the flow of the game ball P in the first guide path forming part 202, and approaches the bottom wall part 203A. This causes the screw member to fall from any of the holes 271A to 271H and be discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming part 202, so that the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 moves and enters the dispensing device 200. Contamination can be suppressed.

Further, the plurality of holes 271A to 271H formed in the bottom wall portion 203A are formed from the midstream portion (near the meandering portion 273) to the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and are formed in the spherical tank forming portion 201. There is a region where no holes are formed between the holes 270A, 270B formed in close positions and the hole 271A that is the most upstream of the holes 271A to 271H. In this way, by forming a region in which a plurality of holes are not formed in the upstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202, the game balls from the ball tank forming part 201 are stacked vertically and flow down. By doing so, it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in the strength of the bottom wall portion 203A near the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 where ball pressure is applied.

Further, by forming a region in which no hole is formed in the first guide passage forming part 202 in this way, the screw member that has fallen from the first guiding passage forming part 202 is formed on the rear wall part of the cover body 220. Intrusion into the inside of the cover body 220 through the heat dissipation holes 220B (see FIG. 6) and the like can be appropriately suppressed.

Further, by providing the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 at positions corresponding to the areas where holes are not formed in the first guide passage forming part 202, the first guiding passage forming part 202 is provided with a screw member. It is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the first guide path forming part 202 and to prevent the screw member falling into the first guide path forming part 202 from falling outside the first guide path forming part 202 and being mixed into the dispensing device 200. be able to.

Further, the largest hole 271H among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H is provided at the position closest to the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member can be suitably inserted from the hole 271H to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, when a screw member falls from the ball tank forming part 201 or the non-covered area 350 into the first guide passage forming part 202, the game ball does not fall in the ball tank forming part 201 or the non-covered area 350. are stacked up and down, so the screw member is often located at the top of the game ball, but the hole 271H is located on the downstream side of the rectifying plate 338 of the cover part 334, that is. , Since the game balls are arranged in a position where they are rectified in one level up and down, the screw member easily falls into the hole 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200.

Furthermore, at least some of the holes 271B to 271H among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided at positions corresponding to the non-covered region 350 in the first guide passage forming part 202, so that the screw member is not covered. Even if it enters the first guide passage forming part 202 from the area 350, it can fall out of the first guiding passage forming part 202 through the holes 271B to 271D.

Furthermore, at least some of the holes 271E to 271H among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided closer to the dispensing device 200 than the non-covered area 350 in the first guide passage forming part 202, so that the above-mentioned As shown, even if a game ball that has fallen from the non-covered area 350 to the first guide path forming part 202 does not reach the holes 271B to 271D, it moves as the game ball flows down and approaches the downward direction and falls from the holes 271E to 271H. Since the probability that this occurs increases, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), (B), and 24, the screw members N3 to N6 that have moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202 are removed from the first guiding passage forming part 202. Recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 as special retention parts that can be retained before reaching 202 are below the screw members N3 to N6 installed in the attachment holes H3 to H6 as the attached parts. The screw members N3 to N6, which were provided in the mounting holes H3 to H6 but did not stay in the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243, are movable toward the cover parts 314, 324, and 334. , it is possible to prevent the screw members N3 to N6 that have come off from the mounting holes H3 to H6 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, the depth of the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 is such that a portion of the screw members N3 to N6 protrudes when the screw members N3 to N6 are housed. The screw members N3 to N6 retained in 214, 242, and 243 can be easily taken out.

Further, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the grooves 326A to 326C, and the recess 336 prevent the falling screw member from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. (or obstruct), but also allows the retention part to remain outside the first guide passage forming part 202, so that the screw member can be discovered by the staff of the game parlor etc. when performing inspection etc. This makes it easier to identify which screw member has come off, making it easier to take countermeasures against screw members getting mixed into the dispensing device 200.

In addition, in the ball stopper member 340 as a specific part, the rotating part 341 is located in the upright position, and the front wall part 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to guide the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 to the second guide. In the first state where the flow is allowed to flow down into the passage forming part 204, the rotating part 341 is located in the tilted position, the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the first guiding passage forming part 202 is in the first state. It is possible to change the game ball into a second state in which it is impossible (or difficult to flow down) into the second guide path forming part 204, and when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, it is better than the first state. By adopting a configuration in which the screw member is more likely to stay than in the case of , it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from getting mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

More specifically, as mentioned above, the ball stopper member 340 is placed in the second state when a game ball is pulled out from within the first guide path or the second guide path, that is, when a clerk at a game parlor or the like removes a game ball from a pachinko game machine. In contrast, the ball stopper member 340 is placed in the first state when the pachinko game machine 1 is in operation, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in operation, that is, when the staff of the game hall cannot monitor it. Therefore, it is possible to suitably prevent the screw member from entering the first guide passage forming portion 202 in such a state.

Further, the ball tank forming portion 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by screw members N11 to N14 having flange portions F as locking portions, and the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching to the gaming machine frame 3 are attached to the first guiding passage forming part 202 and the ball so that they fall outside the first guiding passage forming part 202 even if they come off the gaming machine frame 3. It is attached at a position lower than the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the tank forming portion 201. Therefore, since the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming part 201 are easily loosened due to vibration and the weight of the game balls, the ball tank forming part 201 and Even if the screw members N11 to N14 that attach the first guide passage forming part 202 fall off, they will fall outside the first guiding passage forming part 202. can be prevented from being mixed in.

Further, among the plurality of screw members for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the gaming machine frame 3, a predetermined screw member near the peripheral portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, screw member N12 ) is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (for example, the ground wire 226), so that the number of screw members (number of parts) can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the screw member from getting mixed into the dispensing device 200. In addition, instead of the ground wire, it may also be used as a screw member for attaching a predetermined member other than the ball tank forming part 201 and the first guide passage forming part 202.

Moreover, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming part 201 to the gaming machine frame 3 are attached to the metal plate 222 for reinforcing the gaming machine frame 3, so that the ball tank forming part 201 can be firmly attached, and since vibration is less likely to occur, loosening of the screw member can be suitably suppressed.

In addition, the screw members N3 to N6 installed above the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the gaming machine frame 3 are screw members having a small diameter head NH that does not have a flange portion F. Even if the screw member falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202, it is easy to fall through the holes 271A to 271H, so that it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering the dispensing device 200.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 19(B) and 27, in the area below the first guiding path forming part 202 of the game board 2 which can be attached to and detached from the frame 3 for the game machine, a screw member that has fallen is placed backward. Alternatively, an inclined surface (for example, the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) that can flow down toward the dispensing device 200 side is provided with a gap from the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the cover body 220 It is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen onto the upper wall portion 220H from bouncing and being mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202 again.

Further, although not particularly illustrated, the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A are provided so as not to protrude rearward beyond the rear wall portion of the cover body 220, and if the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A fall onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220, The screw members are guided so as to flow backward or toward the dispensing device 200, thereby preventing the screw members that have fallen onto the upper wall portion 220H from falling into the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A arranged below. It can be prevented.

In addition, the cover body 220 is provided to cover the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, the performance device having a movable body, and the performance control board 12, so that the power generated from these drive sources is A plurality of heat dissipation holes 220B that emit heat are formed in the upper part of the rear wall (see FIG. 6). Preferably, the size is such that NH cannot be inserted. In addition, since there is a high possibility that screw members will fall from the upper hole portions 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H in the upper wall portion 220H disposed directly below the first guide passage forming portion 202, the heat radiation hole 220B is , it is preferable to form them at least in positions that do not correspond to the holes 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H in the upper wall part 220H, or to form them in parts other than the upper wall part 220H (for example, the rear wall part, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to suppress the falling screw member from falling into the cover body 220 and having an adverse effect on the image display device 5, the effect device having a movable body, the effect control board 12, etc.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of the present invention will be described based on FIG. 29. In FIG. 29, (A) is a schematic back view showing a cover part as a modified example, and (B) is a schematic back view showing a state in which cables are wired to cross the cover part.

In the embodiment described above, the guiding passage forming part that forms the guiding passage for guiding the game balls of the ball tank forming part 201 to the payout device 200 has a first guide passage forming part that is provided so as to be inclined downwardly toward the left side. It has a guiding passage forming part 202 and a second guiding passage forming part 204 extending downward from the lower left end of the first guiding passage forming part 202. As shown in FIG. 16, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330, which is provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface, is provided with a ball stopper member 340 on the upper surface of the left end part so as to protrude upward. In the above, a configuration is illustrated in which the screw member N moving to the left on the cover part 334 can be received and retained, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover part of Modification 1 360, the left end portion 360R of the cover portion 360 may be formed in an R shape that curves toward the second guide passage forming portion 204 below.

By doing so, when the game ball P and the screw member N that have fallen onto the cover part 360 move toward the left end side, they do not stay on the cover part 360 and can be moved to the first guiding passage forming part 202. Since the screw member N falls directly out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the left end thereof, it is possible to prevent the screw member N from getting mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 29(B), in a case where a recess 361 in which the screw member N can be retained is formed on the upper surface of the cover part 360, a recess 361 is formed in the cover part 360 at a position near the recess 361. A cable CH may be provided so as to intersect with the downward direction of the game ball in the first guide path forming section 202.

By doing so, the screw member N and the game ball P, which have stayed in the recess 361 but may move due to the inclination, can be kept by restricting their movement with the cable C.

(Explanation regarding transformation and application)
For example, in the embodiment, the screw members N1 to 6, N11 to 16 for attaching the mounting member 223, the first passage forming body 203, etc. to the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and Screw members (not shown) to be attached to other parts of the game machine 1, screw members (not shown) for assembling the frame that constitutes the game island, various devices placed inside the game island (for example, , replenishment device 150, etc.) to the frame structure, etc., but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be used when manufacturing a game machine or when playing a game. All screw members, such as screw members that remain in the pachinko game machine 1 for some reason such as forgetting to install them during on-site maintenance, etc., can be targeted, but at least those screw members that have been installed in the pachinko game machine 1 in advance can be targeted. It is preferable that the screw member be prevented from entering the dispensing device 200.

Further, in the embodiment, the spherical tank forming part 201, which is formed in a box shape with an open top surface by the bottom wall part 203A and the vertical wall part B, is used as an example of a storage part capable of storing game media. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the storage part can store game balls, the front-to-back dimension may be smaller than the front-to-back dimension of the first guide passage forming part 202, like the ball tank forming part 201. It does not have to be long, and may have approximately the same front-to-back dimensions as the first guide passage forming portion 202 or may be shorter. Furthermore, the top surface does not necessarily have to be open as long as it can receive game balls supplied from the replenishing device 150.

In addition, in the embodiment described above, an example is given in which the payout device 200 that can pay out game balls using a rotatable sprocket is applied as a payout unit that can pay out game media, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be a payout device that can pay out game balls using a member other than the sprocket.

Further, in the embodiment described above, as a guide passage forming section that is open at the top and forms a guide passage for guiding game media in the storage section to the payout section, a recess whose top surface is open is formed by the bottom wall section 203A and the vertical wall section 203B. Although the first guide passage forming portion 202 formed in the shape of a groove is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be a passage forming part, and its shape, size, etc. can be changed in various ways. In addition, the width dimension (front-back dimension) may be substantially the same as or larger than the ball tank forming part 201, and the game balls may be guided so as to flow down in a plurality of rows.

In addition, in the embodiment, the ball tank forming part 201 as a storage part capable of storing game balls, and the first guiding passage whose upper surface is open and which guides the game balls of the ball tank forming part 201 to the payout device 200 are provided. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the first guiding passage forming part 202 is integrally molded, the present invention is not limited to this, and the spherical tank forming part 201 and the first guiding passage forming part 202 are separately molded. It may be integrally formed by assembling the members using screw members or the like. In this case, the threaded member for assembling the spherical tank forming part 201 and the first guide passage forming part 202 is also covered by the threaded member of the present invention.

Further, in the embodiment, a configuration in which a screw member can enter from the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming part 202 has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first guiding passage forming part 202 The screw member may be allowed to enter through holes, notches, etc. formed on the side of the vertical wall. In addition, if a screw member may be mixed in the second guide passage forming part 204, a predetermined restriction part for restricting the screw member from falling into the second guiding passage forming part 204, or A specific restriction section or the like may be provided to restrict the movement of the fallen screw member to the dispensing device 200.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330 are applied as the cover parts provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202. Although the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, the entire upper surface of the first guide passage forming section 202 may be covered by the cover section.

Further, in the embodiment, the cover part that covers a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202 may be made of a separate member from the first guiding passage forming part 202, or It may be formed integrally with the first guide passage forming portion 202 in advance. That is, the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be formed in advance into a square tube shape.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the screw member is retained on the cover portion as a predetermined restriction portion for restricting the screw member that has fallen onto the cover portions 314, 324, and 334 from falling to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, but the present invention is not limited to this. A fall regulating part (drop inhibiting part) that can restrict (or inhibit) falling from above the cover part, and a movement regulating part (movement inhibiting part) that can restrict (or inhibit) the movement of screw members on the cover part. Alternatively, it may be a fall guide part such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can fall from above the cover part to the outside of the first guide passage forming part 202. Note that the means capable of regulating or inhibiting falling or movement may include not only a convex portion or a concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adhering a screw member, or the like.

In other words, the predetermined restriction section for restricting the screw member that has fallen onto the cover parts 314, 324, 334 from falling into the first guide passage forming part 202 is the predetermined restriction part for restricting the fall of the screw member onto the first guiding passage forming part 202. It does not just have to be something that makes it impossible for people to fall, it just needs to be something that makes it difficult to fall.

Further, in the embodiment, a plurality of specific restricting parts are provided in the first guiding passage forming part 202 and for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guiding passage forming part 202 to the dispensing device 200. Although the embodiment in which the holes 271A to 271H are applied is shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. or inhibition) may be a movement regulating section (movement inhibiting section). Note that means that can restrict or inhibit movement toward the dispensing device 200 side include not only convex portions and concave portions, but also magnets that can attract metal screw members, adhesive portions that can adhere screw members, etc. It is preferable to provide these at a position that does not affect the flow of the game ball (for example, a part where the game ball does not come into contact, such as a corner between the bottom wall part 203A and the standing wall part 203B).

In other words, the specific restriction section provided in the first guide passage forming part 202 and for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 to the dispensing device 200 is the As long as it can restrict the movement to the side, it does not necessarily make it impossible for the screw member mixed in the first guide passage forming part 202 to move to the dispensing device 200 side, but it can make the movement difficult. It is fine as long as it is something.

Furthermore, when the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming section 202 to the dispensing device 200 is restricted (regulated, inhibited) by the specific restriction section provided in the first guiding path forming section 202, the movement is restricted. The downward movement of the game balls is also restricted by the screw member that is restricted and remains in the first guide passage, and there is a high possibility that the balls will become clogged. If balls become clogged, a replenishment error notification is executed as described above, and a staff member at the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 and removes the ball tank forming part 201 on the back side and the first guide path forming part. There is a high possibility that the status of the game balls in the section 202 will be visually inspected. At this time, since the screw member does not move to the dispensing device 200 and remains in the first guide passage forming part 202, it becomes easier for the store staff etc. to identify that the cause of the ball clogging was the screw member. It becomes possible to take appropriate measures.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the plurality of holes 271A to 271H all have a size that allows the screw member to fall, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are As long as at least two of the holes 271H to 271H are formed so that the screw member can be dropped, the other holes do not need to be able to drop the screw member. Further, the shape and size of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are arbitrary, and can be changed in various ways without being limited to the above-mentioned form.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 are used as the first board installed at a position lower than the first guide path forming part 202, but the present invention is limited to this. However, other boards such as relay boards may also be used.

Further, in the embodiment, the terminal board 210 is used as the second board mounted above the first guide passage forming part 202, but the present invention is not limited to this. , Other substrates such as a relay board may also be used as the second board.

Further, in the embodiment, the main board 11 as the first board and the performance control board 12 are attached to the game board 2 by the board cases 11A and 12A in which these boards are housed by screw members N20 and N21. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the various boards described above as the first board may be directly attached to the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3 without using a board case.

In addition, in the embodiment, the main board 11 as the first board and the production control board 12 have board cases 11A and 12A in which each board is housed with screw members N20 and N21, that is, screw members are used. The terminal board 210, which is attached to the game board 2 as a second board, is attached to the game board 2 by the attachment method, using a locking means consisting of a plurality of regulating parts 235 and a locking part 236 as a mounting means different from the screw member, that is, Although the embodiment has been illustrated in which it is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by a different attachment method than the attachment method using screw members, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. It may include a mounting means, an adhesive means using an adhesive, and the like.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the screw member is provided around the first guide passage forming part 202 to prevent the screw member that has moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202 from falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202. Although a configuration in which the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are applied as special restriction portions for the purpose of A fall regulating part (fall inhibiting part) that can regulate (or inhibit) the fall of the screw member, a movement regulating part (movement inhibiting part) that can regulate (or inhibit) the movement of the screw member to the first guide path forming part 202, , a fall guiding portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can fall out of the first guiding path forming portion 202 may be used. Note that means that can restrict or inhibit falling or movement toward the first guide path forming portion 202 include not only convex portions and concave portions, but also magnets capable of attracting metal screw members, and means capable of adhering screw members. It may also be an adhesive part or the like.

In other words, the special restriction part for restricting the screw member that has come off from falling into the first guide passage forming part 202 is not only one that makes it impossible for the screw member to fall into the first guiding passage forming part 202; Any material that can be made difficult to fall is sufficient. For example, a convex portion serving as a fall regulating portion (fall inhibiting portion), a recessed portion or a hole serving as a movement regulating portion (movement inhibiting portion), etc. may be provided at a predetermined position such as the upper wall portion 225A.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the periphery of the first guide passage forming part 202 in which the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, etc. as special restriction parts are provided is located near the front vertical wall part 203B. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, and at least as long as it is between the attached part (attachment hole) to which the screw member is attached and the guide passage forming part, it is not necessarily provided at a position near the vertical wall part 203B. For example, the screw member may be provided between the attached portion of the screw member and the guide passage forming portion at a position closer to the attached portion than the guiding passage forming portion.

Further, in the embodiment, a first specifying portion is provided on the dispensing device 200 side in the oblique direction of the cover portion 334 as a specific portion capable of retaining the screw member N6 that has fallen onto the cover portion 334. Although the embodiment in which the ball stopping member 340 that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball of the guide passage forming part 202 is allowed to flow down and a second state in which it is difficult or impossible to flow down is applied, the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and any member provided on the dispensing device 200 side (lower inclination side) of the cover part 334 in the inclined direction can restrict the movement of the screw member even if it does not have a ball-stopping function. It may also be a convex portion, a standing wall portion, a wiring holder, etc. that can (or obstruct).

Further, in the embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as a specific part is provided on the dispensing device 200 side in the oblique direction of the cover part 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the specific part may be provided at the end of the cover parts 314, 324 on the dispensing apparatus 200 side, as long as it is provided at the end of one cover part on the dispensing apparatus 200 side.

Further, in the embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific part is configured as a separate member from the cover part 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. A specific part (ball stopper part) may be integrally formed in a part of the member constituting the cover part 334.

Further, in the embodiment, as an example of the locking part, a flange part F (washer) having a larger diameter than the head part NH of the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 and integrally formed with the head part NH is used. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the flange portion F may be replaced with a washer etc. that is formed separately from the screw member and can be attached to the screw member, or a head It also includes the rotation stopper of the head NH formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the NH and the flange portion F (washer), adhesive, and the like. Further, the screw member is not limited to one that can be attached with a tool such as a screwdriver, but may also be a thumbscrew, and includes members such as screws and bolts that separate from the attached part when loosened.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the ball tank forming part 201 as a storage part is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by screw members N11 to N14 having flange parts F as loosening prevention parts, and the ball tank forming part 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the part 201 and the first guiding passage forming part 202 to the gaming machine frame 3 are arranged so that they fall outside the first guiding passage forming part 202 even if they come off the gaming machine frame 3. , the first guide passage forming part 202 and the spherical tank forming part 201 are attached at a position lower than the upper end edge of the vertical wall part 203B, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the position is above the upper edge of the vertical wall 203B of the guiding passage forming part 202 or the spherical tank forming part 201, for example, it may be shifted in the horizontal direction from the position directly above the first guiding passage forming part 202 or the spherical tank forming part 201. If the screw member is attached to a position other than directly above the screw member, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling directly into the first guide passage forming portion 202. Further, the fallen screw member is guided to fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 by a predetermined guide portion (for example, a groove formed in the upper wall portion 225A). Good too.

In addition, the predetermined restriction part, specific restriction part, special restriction part, and identification part in the embodiment are not limited to the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko game machine 1, but also the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko game machine 1, Although the embodiment has been illustrated in which the movement of screw members other than the machine 1 to the payout device 200 is restricted or restricted (inhibited), the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. Restrict or restrict the movement of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16, and further the screw members N3 to N6 attached above the first guide passage forming part 202 and the ball tank forming part 201 to the dispensing device 200. It is preferable that it be formed in a size and shape that allows (inhibition).

(Characteristic part 053SG)
Next, a mode for implementing a gaming machine in the feature section 053SG according to the present invention will be described based on FIGS. 30-1 to 30-24.

The gaming machine in the feature section 053SG is a pachinko gaming machine installed in a gaming hall, a slot machine, etc., and in particular, as shown in FIG. It is equipped with a gaming control board. The pachinko game machine 1 of the above embodiment can be applied as the gaming machine described below, the main board 11 of the above embodiment can be used as the game control board, and the performance control board 12 can be used as the performance control board. It is.

As shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected to a plurality of input components such as various switches and sensors that detect input conditions according to the progress of the game. Input components include, for example, a detection switch that detects an operation by a player, a detection switch that detects the passage of game media such as game balls and medals, a sensor that specifies the position of a movable object used in a game such as a reel, and a sensor that identifies the position of a movable object used in a game such as a reel. These include detection switches used for various settings such as the degree of advantage, and detection switches for detecting door openings, abnormalities, etc.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-1, the game control board is equipped with an input circuit that detects input signals from these input components, and the detection status of input signals from the input components by the input circuit is specified. The input data is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and used to control the game by the game control microcomputer.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected to a plurality of output parts such as a display, an LED, a motor, a solenoid, etc., which perform output control according to the progress of the game. Output parts include, for example, a display that displays according to lottery results, a display that displays the progress of the game and the status of the gaming machine, a display that instructs the player on how to operate, and a value owned by the player. LEDs that indicate the game status, LEDs that notify the occurrence of an abnormality, motors and solenoids that operate movable parts used in games such as reels and variable winning devices.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 30-1, the game control board is provided with an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the corresponding output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. , the game control microcomputer controls the output parts according to the progress of the game by transmitting output data to the output circuit.

In addition, the game control microcomputer, input circuit, and output circuit are connected via a data bus, and input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer, and from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The transmission of the output data of is carried out via a shared data bus.

Also, rather than all input circuits being connected via a shared data bus, some input circuits are directly connected to the gaming control microcomputer without going through a data bus, and are connected via a shared data bus. Input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer without going through the input circuit.

In addition, all output circuits are configured to be connected via a shared data bus, but some output circuits are directly connected to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus, and are connected to the shared data bus. A configuration may also be used in which output data is transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit without going through the data bus.

In addition, the data bus is connected to an external output terminal, and the output data from the gaming control microcomputer is output to external equipment as an external output signal. It is possible to inspect the performance, etc. of a gaming machine using the output data outputted as .

Next, the game control board included in the game machine of the present invention will be explained using Examples 1 to 3 below.

The structure of the game control board in Example 1 will be explained. The game control board has an electronic component mounted on one surface, no electronic component mounted on the other surface, and a terminal provided on the electronic component is soldered.In the following, the electronic component is mounted. The surface is called the mounting surface, and the surface on which electronic components are not mounted and the terminals of the electronic components are soldered is called the soldering surface.

FIG. 30-2 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-3 is a diagram showing the solder surface of the game control board in this example. As shown in FIGS. 30-2 and 30-3, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and is an insulating printed board. Consisted of. In addition, the game control board is formed with a plurality of through holes that penetrate through the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board are made of a conductor so as to connect the through holes as appropriate. A plurality of wiring patterns are formed. Further, in the area where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board, an insulating region made of an insulator and a ground region made of a conductor and forming a ground are formed. The ground area is a solid ground formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulation area are formed on the mounting surface and solder surface of the game control board.

As shown in Figure 30-2, on the mounting surface, the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction is greater than the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction. , the number of wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction is greater than the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are concentrated on the mounting surface, the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are concentrated on the soldering surface, and when the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction intersect, Designs such as detours around wiring patterns can be minimized.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-3, the wiring pattern placed on the solder side has many wires that extend in the same horizontal direction as the long side, so the distance between the wiring patterns is longer than that of the wiring pattern placed on the mounting surface. However, as mentioned above, electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, not on the solder surface, and the relatively long wiring pattern placed on the solder surface is obstructed by the electronic components. This is avoided.

Also, when branching a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, one of the wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the solder surface, and the other is formed on the mounting surface through a through hole. The wiring pattern is branched without detouring one wiring pattern or crossing one wiring pattern and the other wiring pattern at the branch destination on the same plane.

FIG. 30-4 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the input circuit and output circuit mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-4, electronic components such as the aforementioned game control microcomputer, input circuit, output circuit, etc. are mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board. These electronic components include electronic components having one or more terminal rows each consisting of a plurality of terminals arranged in one direction. Most of the electronic components including these terminal rows are arranged along the long sides of the game control board, that is, so as to be lined up in the lateral direction. As mentioned above, on the mounting surface, a large proportion of the wiring patterns extend in the vertical direction, and electronic components with terminal rows are often arranged along the long sides of the game control board, that is, lined up in the horizontal direction. By doing so, the wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction can be directly connected to the rows of terminals arranged in the horizontal direction without changing the direction of the wiring pattern.

In addition, the input circuit and the output circuit of the electronic components having terminal rows are formed in a rectangular shape, and have a concave cutout on one of the short sides, and a surface of the input circuit and the output circuit, as shown in Figure 30-4. The model number is printed, and the orientation of the part can be identified by the direction of the notch and the direction in which the model number is printed. As shown in Figure 30-4, the input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in Figure 30-4 and the direction in which the model number is printed is from left to right, while the output circuit is , in Figure 30-4, the notches are arranged to the right, and the model number is printed in the direction from right to left. It is said that it is possible to specify whether there is an output circuit or an output circuit.

FIG. 30-5 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-6 is a diagram showing the structure of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a branched wiring pattern.

As mentioned above, the game control board is formed with a data bus that is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. . The data bus formed on the game control board of this example is composed of eight horizontally extending wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, and as shown in Figure 30-5, the data bus formed on the game control board It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend horizontally toward the right side from a through hole to which the terminals of the game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in Figure 30-6, electronic components such as data buses, input circuits, and output circuits are connected to wiring patterns that are formed so as to branch to the mounting surface side through through holes and extend vertically in the vertical direction. Connected by

In this way, when connecting the game control microcomputer and electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits that are separated laterally via a data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer are soldered horizontally. It is connected to the data bus on the surface, and branches into a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side that extends vertically toward the electronic component through a through hole at the position where the electronic component is mounted, and is connected to the electronic component. Therefore, there is no need to take a detour through a wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer and electronic components separated laterally can be efficiently connected. In addition, since the wiring patterns that make up the data bus are formed on the solder surface where electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less susceptible to noise from electronic components. Since the connection is made by a wiring pattern that branches to the mounting surface side through the hole, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is short and is less susceptible to the influence of noise from electronic components during this period.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, the horizontally extending wiring patterns constituting the data bus are not formed in a straight line, but are divided into a plurality of horizontally extending wiring patterns. The length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) is determined by the antenna with maximum resonance depending on the bus clock (frequency used when transmitting data on the data bus) when transmitting data on the data bus. It is formed to be shorter than the length (λ (bus clock)/2). Therefore, the wiring pattern constituting the data bus has an antenna length corresponding to the bus clock, thereby preventing unintended radio waves from being emitted due to resonance. Furthermore, even if the length of the antenna corresponding to the bus clock is 1/2, strong resonance may occur due to reflection on the surface of the board. The lengths (L1 to L8) are formed to a length that is not 1/2 of the antenna length at which resonance is maximum depending on the bus clock, and strong resonance occurs due to reflection on the surface of the board. Emission of radio waves is also prevented.

In addition, although the bus clock varies depending on the installed game control microcomputer and oscillator, the length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) depends on the bus clock that has the expected maximum frequency. It is formed to be shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximum, and further not to be half the antenna length at which resonance is maximum, depending on the bus clock at maximum frequency. Therefore, even if data is transmitted using a bus clock that is less than the expected maximum frequency, unintended radio waves are prevented from being generated.

As shown in Figure 30-5, the horizontal wiring patterns that are divided into a plurality of parts constituting the data bus are diagonally rightward or diagonally leftward, that is, the direction of the horizontal wiring patterns that are divided into a plurality of parts is They are connected across wiring patterns that extend in different directions. Further, the horizontal wiring pattern divided into a plurality of parts and the diagonally rightward or diagonally leftward wiring pattern are bent at an obtuse angle and connected. This prevents unintended radio waves from being emitted from the bent portion of the wiring pattern.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-5, mounting is carried out through through holes (A to F shown in Figure 30-5) provided on the diagonal wiring pattern that connects the horizontal wiring patterns divided into multiple parts. It is designed to branch into side wiring patterns (wiring patterns connected to A to F shown in Figure 30-6), and is a diagonal wiring pattern that connects horizontal wiring patterns divided into multiple parts. The wiring pattern that makes up the data bus is now branched using

In addition, in the game control board in Example 1, in order to make the length of the horizontal wiring pattern shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized, the horizontal wiring pattern is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns. In this configuration, horizontal wiring patterns divided into multiple parts are connected to each other by diagonal wiring patterns formed on the same solder surface. In other words, the horizontal wiring pattern is formed alternately on the solder surface and the mounting surface so that the length of the horizontal wiring pattern is shorter than the antenna length that maximizes resonance. Also good. In such a configuration, it is preferable to branch the horizontal wiring pattern at a point where it switches from the solder surface or the mounting surface to the other surface, and by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to bypass the wiring pattern after branching. , it becomes possible to branch the wiring patterns constituting the data bus without crossing them on the same plane.

FIG. 30-7 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-8 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ground area formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground area.

As shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, a ground area is formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulation area are formed on the mounting surface and solder surface of the game control board. The ground area formed on the game control board is composed of a first ground area and a second ground area that are electrically separated via an insulating area. On both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the first ground region is formed in the left region of the game control board, and the second ground region is formed in the right region of the game control board.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-7, wiring patterns to which low voltage (Vcc (+5V) in this example) signals are transmitted are connected to the game control microcomputer, input circuit, output circuit, etc. Electronic components (low voltage components) are mounted in the left region where the first ground region is formed, and the ground terminals of the low voltage components are connected to the first ground region. On the other hand, electronic components (high-voltage components) to which wiring patterns for transmitting high-voltage (VLD (+24V) in this example) signals are connected, such as drive circuits for operating motors, solenoids, etc. The high voltage component is mounted in the right region where the second ground region is formed, and the ground terminal of the high voltage component is connected to the second ground region. This prevents unintended current from flowing back from the high voltage component to the low voltage component via the ground area. Furthermore, since the first ground region and the second ground region are formed on opposite sides of the game control board, they are prevented from interfering with each other even if a temporary potential difference occurs.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 30-9, since a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area, this capacitor causes a gap between the first ground area and the second ground area. Even if a potential difference temporarily occurs, current is prevented from flowing from one ground region to the other ground region.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, an insulating region in which no wiring pattern is formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the first The ground area and the second ground area are electrically separated. Further, the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface are formed to overlap with the first ground area and the second ground area on the solder surface, and the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface are formed so as to overlap with each other. Since the insulating area that separates the ground area and the insulating area that separates the first and second ground areas on the solder surface overlap, there is Even if a temporary potential difference occurs, interference with each other is prevented.

Figure 30-10 is a diagram showing the configuration of the connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in this example, and Figure 30-11 is a diagram showing the connector formed on the solder side of the game control board in this example. It is a diagram showing a peripheral wiring pattern, and FIG. 30-12 is a diagram showing a state in which the game control board in this embodiment is housed in a board case.

As shown in FIG. 30-10, a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN7 for connecting wiring from outside the game control board are mounted on the game control board near the lower side of the mounting surface. The wiring from the game control board includes a signal that triggers a lottery, a signal that allows setting values that define advantages for players such as lottery probability to change to a state that can be changed, and a signal that allows changing the setting value. Wiring that inputs or outputs signals related to the advantageousness of the game, such as signals that display information advantageous to the player on an external display, wiring that inputs detection signals for error cancellation operations, and backup power supplies. Includes wiring as a supply line.

As shown in FIG. 30-10, the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. As shown at -11, it is connected to a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, that is, the surface opposite to the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 30-10, no wiring pattern is formed around the mounting parts of connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface, and information about the connectors such as connector numbers is printed around them. ing. Note that the information printed around the mounting portions of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is not limited to the connector number, but may also include information regarding the number of terminals, the direction of the connector, the connection destination, etc.

As shown in Figure 30-11, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on connectors CN1 to CN7 on the solder side passes through the through hole at the end opposite to the side connected to the terminal, and the wiring on the mounting surface. connected to the pattern. In particular, the through holes a to h shown in Figures 30-10 and 30-11 are through holes to which terminals of electronic components are connected, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided in connectors CN1 to CN7. It is provided at the location where it is first connected to the electronic component. Therefore, the solder surface can be connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface by using the through hole for connecting to the electronic component.

As shown in FIGS. 30-12(A) and (B), the game control board is attached to the gaming machine while being housed in the board case. The board case can be sealed with one-way screws, seals, welding, etc., and once sealed, it is difficult to open it without leaving traces. Therefore, by attaching the game control board to the gaming machine while it is housed in the board case, the game control board is structured to be prevented from being tampered with.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-12(A) and (B), the board case is provided with a covering portion that covers the area around the connectors CN1 to CN7 when the game control board is housed. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 30-10, the wiring pattern is not formed in the area covered by the covering part of the board case on the mounting surface of the game control board, but the wiring pattern is formed avoiding the area. There is. The covering portion is provided with insertion holes having substantially the same shape as the connectors CN1 to CN7, through which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed to the outside and can be connected to external wiring.

Even when the game control board is stored in the board case in this way, there will be some gaps around the connectors CN1 to CN7 because the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to external wiring, but the connectors CN1 to CN7 The terminals provided on the terminals are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the soldering surface, that is, the surface on which connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. It is designed to be connected to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite side, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of connectors CN1 to CN7 can be short-circuited from around the part where connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case. This prevents fraudulent activities such as disconnection.

Furthermore, the area around the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface is covered by the covering part of the board case, and the area covered by the covering part has wiring connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7. None of the wiring patterns including patterns are formed, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the wiring patterns on the mounting surface in areas other than the covering part, Illegal acts such as short-circuiting or disconnecting the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1-CN7 from around the portion where the connectors CN1-CN7 are exposed from the board case are reliably prevented.

FIG. 30-13 is a circuit diagram related to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-13, Vcc (+5V) is generated on the power supply board and is connected to the power input terminal Vcc of the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board. In addition, Vcc (+5V) is branched from the line supplied to the gaming control microcomputer on the power supply board, and is connected to the charging capacitor via the backflow prevention diode. A line branched between is connected to a backup power supply input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer.

While power is being supplied, Vcc (+5V) is supplied as a power source for driving the game control microcomputer, and the charging capacitor is charged. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the supply of Vcc (+5V) is stopped, and the backup power supply VBB charged in the charging capacitor is supplied to the game control microcomputer. The game control microcomputer is supplied with a backup power supply VBB so that data stored in the RAM included in the game control microcomputer is retained. In this embodiment, the backup power source is supplied from a power supply board outside the game control board, but it may be supplied from a circuit provided within the game control board.

FIG. 30-14 is a diagram showing a power supply wiring pattern formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-15 is a diagram showing a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this example. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the relationship between the printed wiring pattern and the power supply wiring pattern formed on the solder surface.

As shown in FIG. 30-14, on the solder side of the game control board, there are wiring patterns Vcc1 to Vcc3 that supply normal power, and wiring patterns VBB that supply backup power, as wiring patterns that constitute the power supply line. , is formed. As shown in FIGS. 30-14 and 30-15, the wiring patterns Vcc1 to Vcc3 are composed of a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface and a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, and are mounted on the game control board. Connected to electronic components. On the other hand, the wiring pattern VBB is composed only of the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, as shown in FIG. 30-14. That is, the wiring pattern VBB is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer through only the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface without being connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied from the power supply board is formed only on the solder surface. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied does not need to bypass the electronic components mounted on the mounting surface, and the distance of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer can be shortened, so it is free from external noise. This prevents data stored in the RAM from being damaged by noise.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-15, on the mounting surface, a solid ground is formed in the portion where the wiring pattern VBB is formed on the solder surface side. Therefore, noise is blocked by the solid ground formed on the mounting surface, making the wiring pattern VBB on the solder surface side less susceptible to noise. Also, as shown in Figure 30-15, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying backup power is closer to the mounting surface than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power. It is formed at a position where the number of intersections with the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side, especially the wiring pattern used for signal transmission, is reduced in the corresponding area. Therefore, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied from the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side and used for signal transmission is suppressed as much as possible.

Note that, in this embodiment, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying backup power is closer to the corresponding area on the mounting surface side than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power. The configuration is such that it is formed in a position where there are fewer intersections with the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting side, but among the wiring patterns formed on the solder side, the signal that triggers the lottery Wiring patterns that transmit signals that are related to the player's interests, such as signals that control output parts, are better suited to the mounting side than wiring patterns that transmit signals that are not directly related to the player's history, such as signals that control output parts. By configuring the wiring pattern to be formed in a position where there are fewer intersections with the wiring pattern used for transmitting signals formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding area, it can be used for transmitting signals formed on the mounting surface side. The influence of noise on the wiring pattern through which signals related to the player's profits are transmitted is suppressed as much as possible.

In addition, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, wiring patterns that transmit reset signals to the game control microcomputer and wiring patterns that provide an operating clock to the game control microcomputer are relatively important. A location where the wiring pattern for signal transmission intersects with the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side, rather than the wiring pattern for transmitting other signals. By configuring the wiring pattern to be formed in a position where there is less noise, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern used to transmit signals of relatively high importance from the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side used for signal transmission is minimized. It can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-16 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which a game control board is attached to a slot machine. Slot machines are equipped with game components related to games, such as a liquid crystal display, a production control board that controls production, a reel unit consisting of a plurality of reels, and a hopper unit that pays out medals. When attaching the game control board to the slot machine, the mounting side of the game control board, that is, the side opposite to the solder side on which the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied is formed, should be placed on the game component side. Attached to be placed. With such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from the game components on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-17 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which a game control board is attached to a pachinko game machine. When a pachinko game machine is installed in a game parlor, it is often installed so that its back faces face each other with other game devices such as other pachinko game machines. When the game control board is attached to a pachinko game machine, the mounting side of the game control board, that is, the side opposite to the solder side on which the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied is formed, is used for other games. It is attached so that it is placed on the device side. With this configuration, the influence of noise emitted from other gaming machines on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied can be suppressed.

(effect 1)
In the game control board of this embodiment, wiring patterns are formed on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface has a proportion of the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (vertical direction). The proportion of wiring patterns formed on the solder surface is larger than the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction), which is different from the first direction. It is characterized by a larger proportion of the wiring patterns extending in the direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) are concentrated on the soldering surface, so that the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are concentrated on the soldering surface. When a wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction) intersects with a wiring pattern extending in the second direction (horizontal direction), it is possible to minimize the need for detours around the wiring pattern.

The game control board of this embodiment is a square consisting of a pair of sides (left side and right side) extending in a first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of sides (upper side and lower side) extending in a second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized by its shape. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern can be formed without waste along the shape of the game control board.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components including a terminal row consisting of a plurality of terminals are arranged so that the terminal rows are lined up in the second direction (horizontal direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (left-right direction) can be directly connected to the electronic component.

The game control board of this embodiment has a pair of short sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of long sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). It has a rectangular shape, and is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, a wiring pattern in the second direction (horizontal direction), which can be long in distance, can be formed on the solder surface without being obstructed by electronic components.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern includes a wiring pattern that branches from a first wiring pattern to a second wiring pattern, and one of the two wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the mounting surface, The other wiring pattern is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to detour one wiring pattern at the branch destination or to cross one wiring pattern at the branch destination and the other wiring pattern on the same plane, and the wiring pattern can be suitably arranged. can be formed.

(effect 2)
The game control board of this embodiment connects the first terminal (terminal of the game control microcomputer) and the second terminal (terminal of the input circuit, output circuit) separated in a specific direction (left and right direction), and connects a specific signal (terminal of the input circuit, output circuit). A specific wiring pattern (data bus) used for transmitting (input data, output data) is formed, and the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is divided into multiple wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left/right direction). Each straight line wiring pattern that is formed by dividing and extending in a specific direction (left and right) has a specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length according to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by being formed shorter than the According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed by dividing into a plurality of wiring patterns each consisting of a straight line wiring pattern extending in a particular direction (horizontal direction); Each wiring pattern is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length according to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), so that the specific wiring pattern (data bus ) can be prevented from having an antenna length that corresponds to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data), and can prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (left-right direction). . According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In addition, the game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (left-right direction). However, a configuration may also be adopted in which wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are alternately formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. Even in such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) is a wiring pattern that is different from the specific wiring pattern (data bus) between one wiring pattern and another wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized by branching into According to such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be suitably branched using the space between one wiring pattern and another wiring pattern extending in a specific direction.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left and right direction) has an antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency (maximum frequency assumed as a bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by being formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2). According to such a configuration, since the length of the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left and right direction) is shorter than the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency of a specific signal (input data, output data), This prevents unintended radio waves from being emitted even if a signal is transmitted.

In the gaming control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction has a specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length according to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by a length that is not 1/2 (λ/4). According to such a configuration, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) becomes 1/2 of the specific length (λ/2), and strong resonance occurs due to reflection from the surface of the board. Since there is no radio wave, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted.

(Effect 3)
The game control board of this embodiment includes a first electronic component (low voltage component) connected to a wiring pattern to which a signal of a first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is transmitted, and a second voltage (VDL (+24V)). A second electronic component (high voltage component) is connected to a wiring pattern through which a signal is transmitted, a first electronic component (low voltage component) is connected to the first ground area, and a second electronic component ( A high voltage component) is characterized in that it is connected to a second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulating part. According to such a configuration, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern to which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is transmitted is connected to the first ground area, and the second voltage (VDL (+24V)) The second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern to which the signal is transmitted is connected is connected to the second ground area separated from the first ground area by the insulation part (insulation area). This prevents unintended current from flowing backwards through the ground.

In addition, in the game control board of this embodiment, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern to which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is transmitted is connected is connected to the first ground area, A second electronic component (high voltage component) to which a wiring pattern to which a second voltage (VDL (+24V)) signal is transmitted is connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating section. Regarding the configuration, in a configuration in which there is a large difference in current flowing through wiring patterns connected between the first electronic component and the second electronic component, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component is connected to the first ground area. It may be configured to be connected to a second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulating part, and with such a configuration, the wiring connected between the first electronic component and the second electronic component. Even if the difference in current flowing through the patterns is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area and the second electronic component is connected to the second ground area, so unintended current flows backward through the ground. This can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. According to such a configuration, even if a potential difference temporarily occurs between the first ground region and the second ground region due to the capacitor, it is possible to prevent current from flowing from one ground region to the other ground region. .

The game control board of this embodiment has a first ground area formed on one side (left side), a second ground area formed on the other side (right side) opposite to the one side, and a first electronic component (low voltage component). ) is mounted in the first ground area, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) is mounted in the second ground area. According to such a configuration, since the first ground area and the second ground area are respectively formed on opposing sides of the game control board, they can be prevented from interfering with each other even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

The game control board of this example has a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) in which no wiring pattern is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface. It is characterized by According to such a configuration, the insulation between the first ground region and the second ground region can be improved.

Note that the game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. Even in a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on at least one of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the first ground area and The insulation between the second ground regions can be improved.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface and the first ground area and the second ground area on the solder surface are formed in corresponding areas, respectively, and the mounting surface The non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) on the solder surface and the non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) on the solder surface are also formed in corresponding areas. According to such a configuration, even if a potential difference temporarily occurs from one surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface to the other surface, interference with each other can be prevented.

(Effect 4)
The game control board of this embodiment is installed in a game machine while being housed in a board case, and connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) for attaching wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the mounting surface. The terminals of (connectors CN1 to CN7) are characterized in that they are connected to wiring patterns formed on the solder surface. According to this configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected not to the mounting surface on which the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are mounted, but to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface on the opposite side. It is possible to prevent unauthorized acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from around the part where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring connected to the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is the wiring related to the gaming advantage (signal for transitioning to a state where the setting value can be changed, changing the setting value It is characterized by including wiring for inputting or outputting signals for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display. According to such a configuration, fraudulent acts related to the advantage of the game can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that information (connector number) regarding the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is displayed around the mounting portion of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. According to this configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern is formed around the mounting part of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. Therefore, by displaying information (connector number) regarding the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) in this area, it is possible to effectively utilize the area on the mounting surface where the wiring pattern is not formed.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the board case includes a covering part that covers the area around the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is as follows. It is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface in the area covered by the covering part. According to this configuration, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is not formed on the mounting surface even in the peripheral area of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), so the connector It is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (CN1 to CN7) from around the exposed portions of the connectors (CN1 to CN7).

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface at the point where it is first connected to the electronic component. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to connect to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through hole for connecting to the electronic component.

(Effect 5)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components including a microcomputer for game control having a storage means (RAM) are mounted on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. The microcomputer for game control can hold the memory contents of the storage means (RAM) using a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) supplied by the wiring pattern, and the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) is used by the microcomputer for game control. The wiring pattern (VBB) to be supplied to the semiconductor device is characterized in that it is formed only on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern for supplying a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface where no electronic components are mounted, so it is possible to bypass the electronic components. Since it is not necessary to form a wiring pattern and the distance of the wiring pattern can be shortened, it is less susceptible to external noise, and it is possible to prevent data stored in the storage means (RAM) from being damaged by noise.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is mounted so that the mounting surface side is placed on the side of game components related to the game (such as a liquid crystal display and a performance control board that controls the performance). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from the game components on the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is mounted so that the mounting surface side is placed on the other gaming machine (other gaming machine) side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from other gaming devices on the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the gaming control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment has a solid area on the mounting surface side corresponding to the area where the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is provided on the solder surface. It is characterized by the formation of a ground. According to such a configuration, noise from the mounting surface side can be blocked by the solid ground formed on the mounting surface.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is set to A feature is that there are few intersections with the wiring pattern for transmitting signals in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side. According to such a configuration, the influence of noise from the wiring pattern for transmitting signals on the mounting surface side can be prevented as much as possible.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the spirit of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say, it can be done.

For example, in this embodiment, an example is explained in which the configuration according to the present invention is applied to a game control board that controls games, but other boards installed in a gaming machine, such as a board that controls performances. The configuration according to the present invention may be applied to a board that controls the provision of game media and gaming value, and further, a board that relays between boards.

The structure of the game control board in Example 2 will be explained. Similar to the first embodiment, the game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, no electronic components are mounted on the other surface, and terminals included in the electronic components are soldered. The configuration of the game control board in Example 2 is basically the same as the configuration of the game control board in Example 1, and here, mainly the different configurations from the game control board in Example 1 will be explained. .

FIG. 30-18 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and FIG. 30-19 is a diagram showing the solder surface of the game control board in this example.

As shown in FIGS. 30-18 and 30-19, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and is an insulating printed board. Consisted of. In addition, a plurality of through holes are formed in the game control board, and a plurality of wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and solder surface of the game control board so as to appropriately connect the through holes. Furthermore, an insulating region and a ground region are formed in the mounting surface and solder surface of the game control board in the region where the wiring pattern is not formed.

Similarly to the game control board of Example 1, the game control board in Example 2 is also equipped with an input circuit and an output circuit, and these input circuits and output circuits are formed in a rectangular shape, and A concave notch is provided on one of the sides, and a model number is printed on the surface, so that the orientation of the part can be identified by the direction of the notch and the direction in which the model number is printed. The input circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the left side in the figure and the printing direction of the model number is from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the right side in the figure and the model number is printed in the direction from left to right. They are arranged so that the printing direction is from right to left, and it is possible to identify whether these electronic components are input circuits or output circuits by the position of the notch and the direction in which the model number is printed. There is.

FIG. 30-20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-21 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a branched wiring pattern.

A data bus is formed on the game control board, which is used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The data bus formed on the game control board of this example is composed of eight horizontally extending wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, and as shown in Figure 30-20, the data bus formed on the game control board It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend horizontally toward the right side from a through hole to which the terminals of the game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in Figure 30-21, the data bus, input circuit, and output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern that branches to the mounting surface side through a through hole and extends vertically in the vertical direction. .

In this way, when connecting a game control microcomputer and input circuits and output circuits that are separated laterally via a data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer are connected to a data bus on the solder side that extends laterally. At the position where the input circuit or output circuit is mounted, it branches into a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side that extends vertically toward the input circuit or output circuit through a through hole, and is connected to the input circuit or output circuit. becomes. Therefore, there is no need to take a detour through a wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer can be efficiently connected to input circuits and output circuits that are separated laterally. In addition, since the wiring pattern that makes up the data bus is formed on the solder surface where electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less susceptible to noise from electronic components, and furthermore, the data bus is connected to the input circuit and output circuit. are connected by a wiring pattern that branches to the mounting surface side through a through hole, so that the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is short and is less susceptible to the influence of noise from electronic components during this time.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-22, the data bus is connected to a noise removal circuit at a position closer to the gaming control microcomputer than any of the input circuits and output circuits connected to the data bus. This makes it difficult for noise on the data bus to affect the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-20, the game control board has connectors CN10 to CN17 mounted near the top side in the figure for connecting wiring from outside the game control board, and also connects a data bus. The constituting wiring pattern is formed in a region of the game control board near the bottom side in the figure, that is, a region near the other side opposite to one side where the connectors CN10 to CN17 are mounted. For this reason, a wide area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits is secured between the data bus and the connectors CN10 to CN17 where signals are input/output to and from external electronic components of the game control board. It has become.

As shown in Figures 30-20 and 30-21, the game control board receives an input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used to control the game (which does not trigger the lottery). A first input circuit that detects an input from a second input component that is more important than the first input component (a sensor or switch detection signal that triggers a lottery, an advantageous Based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, the movable parts such as solenoids and motors operate according to the progress of the game. A first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that performs the process, and a second output that displays various displays, LEDs, etc. according to the progress of the game based on the output data from the game control microcomputer. A second output circuit that outputs output signals to the components is mounted on the game control board based on output data from the game control microcomputer, and is used to determine the payout rate etc. of the game machine when playing games over a certain period of time. A third output circuit is implemented to output an output signal to a performance indicator that displays performance.

Among these input circuits and output circuits, the first output circuit, first output circuit, second output circuit, and third output circuit are connected to a data bus, and input data transmission and output data transmission are performed via the data bus. will be carried out.

As shown in Figure 30-20, the wiring pattern constituting the data bus connected to the terminals of the game control microcomputer on the solder side branches to the mounting side through through holes at multiple locations, and vertically branches on the mounting side. It is connected to the wiring pattern formed in the direction. As shown in FIGS. 30-21, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position M in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first input circuit. Further, a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through a through hole at a position N in the figure is connected to a terminal of a third output circuit. Further, wiring patterns branched to the mounting surface side through through holes at positions O and P in the figure are connected to terminals of the first output circuit. In addition, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at position Q in the figure is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit and branches on the mounting surface, and some wiring patterns are left as they are to the outside. The remaining wiring pattern is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side through a through hole at position R in the figure, and then connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting side through a through hole again at position S in the figure. and connected to the external output terminal.

As shown in Figures 30-20 and 30-21, among the input and output circuits connected by a shared data bus, the input circuit has a longer wiring pattern to the gaming control microcomputer than the output circuit. Connected to the data bus so that it is short. Therefore, the input data used to control the game is less likely to be affected by noise or the like.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, output signals are sent to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game among the plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus. The first output circuit that outputs the output signal has a shorter wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game. connected to the data bus. This prevents the output data from being affected by noise or the like, which would affect the operation of the movable part in accordance with the progress of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 30-20 and 30-21, among the plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus, the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance display is other than the performance display. The length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the display device (second output component) that displays the progress of the game. connected to the bus. For this reason, it is difficult to tamper with the contents of the performance display due to the placement of unauthorized parts, etc.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-21, the wiring pattern on the mounting side, which is connected through the through hole at the position Q in the figure, from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the solder side, changes depending on the progress of the game. It is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that outputs, and the wiring pattern branches on the mounting surface and outputs the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device. Connected to the external output terminal for output to. In this way, the data bus formed on the solder surface is connected to the second output circuit in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface using the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through hole. The wiring pattern is divided into the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the external output terminal for outputting output signals according to the progress of the game to external equipment. Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side in order to branch to each wiring pattern connected to the wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

In addition, the wiring pattern on the mounting side connected through the through hole from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the solder side is a second output component that outputs an output signal to a second output component that outputs according to the progress of the game. In addition to being connected to the terminals of the 2-output circuit, it also has a configuration in which it branches on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern is connected to an output circuit for outputting output signals to external equipment in accordance with the progress of the game. Even with this configuration, it is possible to use the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through hole from the data bus formed on the solder surface to output output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface. By branching the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the output circuit for outputting output signals according to the progress of the game to external equipment, it is possible to connect to multiple output circuits. Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side in order to branch to each wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

The second input circuit among the input circuits is not connected to the data bus, and input data is directly transmitted to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus. As shown in Figure 30-21, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the game control microcomputer on the mounting surface is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side through a through hole at position T in the diagram, and then connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side at position T in the diagram. At this position, it is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side through the through hole again, and then connected to the terminal of the second input circuit.

In this way, the first input circuit that detects the input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used for game control, connects to the game control microcomputer via the data bus. A second input circuit that detects an input signal from a second input component that has higher importance than the first input component is connected directly to the data bus without being connected to the data bus. It is connected to the game control microcomputer, and the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is transmitted through the data bus through which input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since the input data based on important input signals is transmitted to the gaming control microcomputer without going through any intermediaries, the input data based on important input signals is not affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit. It will be transmitted.

(Effect 6)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output circuit. According to such a configuration, the input circuit that transmits input data based on input signals from electronic components (input components) used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer is connected to the game control microcomputer. The input circuit is connected to the data bus in such a way that the wiring pattern to the gaming control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit that outputs output signals to electronic components (output components) based on the output data transmitted from the input circuit. Data can be prevented from being affected by noise and the like.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit, but the output circuit is connected to the input circuit. It is also possible to connect to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the game control microcomputer. An output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) transmits input data to the gaming control microcomputer based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the gaming control microcomputer. Since the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so as to be shorter than the input circuit, the output data can be prevented from being affected by noise or the like.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer; a second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output component that performs display according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, and the first output circuit includes: It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the first output circuit outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game, and the second output circuit outputs the output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game. Since the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that it is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs output signals to the components, the output data may be affected by noise etc. It is possible to prevent the operation of the movable part from being affected in accordance with the progress.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. The output circuit may be configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit. A second output circuit outputs an output signal to a second output component that performs display, and a first output circuit outputs an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game. is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is short, which prevents output data from being affected by noise and other factors that affect the display as the game progresses. can.

In addition, like the game control board of Example 1, the first ground area where low voltage components are mounted is formed on the left side where the game control microcomputer is arranged, and the first ground area where high voltage components are mounted on the right side. When a two-ground area is formed, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game often belongs to high-voltage components. The second output circuit, which is mounted in the second ground area and outputs an output signal to the second output part that displays according to the progress of the game, is mounted in the first ground area because it often belongs to low voltage parts. The Rukoto. In such a configuration, the second output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the gaming control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit, and the second output circuit is connected to the first ground. By mounting the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, in the second ground region, there is no need to mount the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, together with the first output circuit, which is a high-voltage component, in the second ground region, which prevents a load from being applied to the second output circuit. can.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. Electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, and a data bus is formed on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected from the data bus through the through hole is output on the mounting surface according to the progress of the game. It is characterized by branching into a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit for playing the game and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. According to such a configuration, the second output for outputting according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side using the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through hole from the data bus formed on the solder surface. The wiring pattern connected to the circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting output signals according to the progress of the game to external equipment are to be branched, so in order to branch to each of these wiring patterns, Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the solder surface to the mounting surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. a first input circuit that transmits input data based on an input signal from a first input component used to control the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, and a first input circuit that is used to control the game control microcomputer. A second input circuit transmits input data based on input signals from two input components to the game control microcomputer, and a second output circuit transmits input data to the first output component and second output component based on output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. The first output circuit, the first output circuit, and the second output circuit are connected to a gaming control microcomputer via a data bus. , the second input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the game control microcomputer without a data bus. According to such a configuration, the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is used for game control without going through the data bus through which input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the microcomputer, input data based on important input signals can be transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by input data from other input circuits or output data to the output circuit. .

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, and a data bus is formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus, input circuit, and output circuit are connected through a through hole to the mounting surface opposite to the solder surface on which the data bus is formed, by a wiring pattern that branches out. It is said that According to such a configuration, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, so that the influence of noise can be reduced.

In the gaming control board of this embodiment, connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from outside the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus is opposite to one side of the gaming control board. It is characterized by being formed in an area closer to the other side (lower side). According to this configuration, an area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits can be secured between the connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) and the data bus, so that the board area can be used effectively. .

The gaming control board of this embodiment is equipped with a performance indicator that displays the performance of the gaming machine, and a third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator outputs an output signal to other indicators. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs. According to such a configuration, the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance display device is more connected to the gaming control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to other display devices. By shortening the wiring pattern, it is possible to make it difficult to tamper with display contents due to the placement of illegal parts.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted so that the orientation of the components is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily understand the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus is connected to the noise removal circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than the input circuit and output circuit. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the game control microcomputer.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this second embodiment, and even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention, they are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Furthermore, configurations that are the same as or similar to those of the first embodiment have the same effects as those described in the first embodiment. Furthermore, the modifications illustrated in the first embodiment are also applicable to the second embodiment.

The structure of the game control board in Example 3 will be explained. Similar to Examples 1 and 2, the game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, no electronic components are mounted on the other surface, and terminals included in the electronic components are soldered. In addition, the game control board in Example 3 is characterized by the structure of the electronic components and through-holes mounted, and here, the structure of the electronic components and the through-holes will be explained.

30-23 are perspective views showing the structure of specific electronic components mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above of the specific electronic components, and (B) is , is a perspective view from below of the specific electronic component.

The specified electronic component is a relatively large electronic component such as a key switch, and the lower part of the specified electronic component has a mounting plate for fixing the specified electronic component to the board, as shown in Figures 30-23 (A) and (B). fixed terminals 1 and 2 that are used for the purpose of propagating signals and power of specific electronic components; connection terminals that are connected to the wiring pattern of the board and used for propagating signals and power of specific electronic components; is provided. Further, above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 on the side surface of the specific electronic component, the model number of the specific electronic component is stamped or printed.

In this embodiment, a key switch having both a fixing terminal and a connection terminal is exemplified as the specific electronic component, but other electronic components may be used as the specific electronic component. An electronic component that does not include a fixing terminal but only has a connection terminal may be used as the specific electronic component.

The through hole provided in the game control board consists of a normal through hole and a specific through hole. Normally, as shown in Figure 30-24 (A), through-holes are plated with copper, which is a conductor, from the solder surface to the inner circumferential surface of the through-hole, so that the through-hole is connected to the mounting surface and the solder surface. It is a through-hole that conducts through. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 30-24 (B), a specific through hole is a through hole in which copper plating is not applied to the inner peripheral surface of the through hole, and the through hole does not conduct between the mounting surface and the solder surface. be.

Normally, when soldering a through hole from the solder side, as shown in Figure 30-24 (A), the through hole is copper plated, so the solder inside the through hole reaches the mounting surface. However, when soldering to a specific through hole from the solder side, as shown in Figure 30-24 (B), the inside of the through hole must be soldered because copper plating is not applied inside the through hole. This prevents solder from flowing up and reaching the mounting surface.

In this embodiment, the specific electronic component is fixed by inserting the fixing terminals 1 and 2 into the specific through holes, inserting the connecting terminals into the normal through holes, and soldering from the solder side.

In this way, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are inserted into the specified through holes and fixed by soldering from the soldering surface side, so the solder does not reach the mounting surface, so when soldering, the solder It is possible to prevent problems such as the model number printed or engraved above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 being hidden by the solder because it is too high on the mounting surface side where components are mounted.

In particular, if the model number is hidden by solder, there is a risk that it will not be discovered even if a part is illegally replaced.Furthermore, if the model number is hidden during the type test, the component configuration cannot be identified and the test will not pass, resulting in approval. There is a risk that the terminals with the model number printed or engraved on the top may not be approved for installation at the gaming parlor because the model number cannot be confirmed at the time of installation at the gaming parlor. This problem can be prevented by fixing with.

On the other hand, fixing terminals 1 and 2 are terminals that are not used for propagating signals or power from specific electronic components, so problems may occur if the electrical connection becomes weak when soldering through specific through holes. Never. On the other hand, since the connection terminal is usually inserted through a through hole and fixed by soldering from the soldering surface side, the electrical connection can be ensured by the solder reaching the mounting surface.

(Effect 7)
In the gaming control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and a wiring pattern is formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. A terminal is inserted into a through hole that penetrates the surface and the solder surface, and the terminal is fixed by soldering the through hole and the terminal, forming a specific through hole to which a specific electronic component among multiple electronic components is fixed. The specific through hole is characterized in that the solder surface of the mounting surface is not electrically conductive, and when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the solder surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. According to such a configuration, the specific through hole does not conduct between the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the soldering surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. At this time, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much to the mounting surface side on which electronic components are mounted and causing problems.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that terminals for fixing specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into specific through holes and soldered. According to this configuration, the specific through hole is soldered to the specific through hole because the terminals for fixing the specific electronic component (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are soldered to the specific through hole, so that the solder does not reach the mounting surface. By not doing so, there will be no problem even if the electrical connection becomes weak.

The game control board of this embodiment has a structure in which terminals for fixing specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into specific through holes and soldered. A configuration may also be used in which terminals (connection terminals) for transmitting component signals and power are inserted and soldered. With this configuration, solder does not rise too much to the mounting surface where electronic components are mounted. It is possible to prevent problems caused by short circuits between terminals that transmit signals and power of specific electronic components and other terminals.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the model number of the specific electronic component is displayed (printed or engraved) above the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much to the mounting surface side on which electronic components are mounted and hiding the model number of the specific electronic component.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this third embodiment, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Furthermore, configurations that are the same as or similar to those of the first and second embodiments have the same effects as those described in the first and second embodiments. Moreover, the modifications illustrated in Examples 1 and 2 are also applicable to Example 3.

(Invention of characteristic part 053SG)
As explained above, the feature section 053SG includes the following inventions. In other words, conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines have generally been equipped with a board on which electronic devices are mounted, as described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-93428. As this type of board, one has been proposed that inputs and outputs data between a control means such as a CPU and other electronic equipment using one data bus. In this type of board, various problems exist regarding the design of the wiring pattern. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine in which the wiring pattern of the board is suitably formed, the gaming machine of feature part 053SG (1) is as follows:
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. including a data bus that is
The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the output circuit.
According to this feature, an input circuit that transmits input data to the control means based on an input signal from an electronic component used for controlling the control means outputs data to the electronic component based on output data transmitted from the control means. Since the wiring pattern up to the control means is connected to the data bus so as to be shorter than the output circuit that outputs the signal, input data can be prevented from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine (2) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in (1),
The board (game control board) is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The gaming machine (3) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in (1) or (2),
The data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected through a through hole to a surface (mounting surface) opposite to the surface (soldering surface) on which the data bus is formed by a wiring pattern that branches out. It is a feature.
According to this feature, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, so that the influence of noise can be reduced.
The gaming machine (4) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3),
On the board (game control board), connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from outside the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus is connected to the board (game control board). It is characterized in that it is formed in a region near the other side (lower side) opposite to the one side of the control board).
According to this feature, an area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits can be secured between the connector and the data bus, so that the board area can be used effectively.

The gaming machine (5) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4),
A performance indicator that displays the performance of the gaming machine is mounted on the board (gaming control board),
The output circuit (third output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the performance display device is more effective than the output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the other display device. The device is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus in such a way that the wiring pattern up to the microcomputer (for use with the computer) is short.
According to this feature, the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance indicator has a shorter wiring pattern to the control means than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to other indicators, so it is possible to prevent unauthorized parts from being used. It is possible to make it difficult to tamper with the display contents by changing the arrangement of the display, etc.

The gaming machine (6) of feature part 053SG is the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5),
The input circuit and the output circuit are characterized in that they are mounted on the board so that their components are oriented in different directions.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily understand the difference between an input circuit and an output circuit.

The gaming machine (7) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6),
The data bus is characterized in that it is connected to the noise removal circuit at a position closer to the control means (game control microcomputer) than the input circuit and the output circuit.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the control means.

The gaming machine (8) of feature part 053SG is
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. including a data bus that is
The output circuit outputs an output to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). A first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs a signal, and a second electronic component (second output circuit) that performs display according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component);
The first output circuit (first output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the second output circuit (second output circuit). It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the first output circuit outputs an output signal to the first electronic component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game, and the first output circuit outputs the output signal to the second electronic component that performs the display according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since it is connected to the data bus in such a way that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal, the output data is not affected by noise etc. This can prevent the operation of the parts from being affected.

The gaming machine (9) of feature part 053SG is,
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. including a data bus that is
The board (game control board) has electronic components mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface), and is connected to the data bus through a through hole. A first wiring pattern (a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit) for outputting the wiring pattern on the first surface (mounting surface) according to the progress of the game on the first surface (mounting surface). It is characterized by branching into a second wiring pattern (a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal) for outputting an output signal to an external device in accordance with the progress of the game.
According to this feature, the data bus formed on the second side is connected to the first side by using the wiring pattern on the first side through the through hole to perform output according to the progress of the game on the first side. Since the wiring pattern and the output signal according to the progress of the game are branched to the second wiring pattern for outputting to the external device, the wiring pattern is formed on the second side in order to branch into the first wiring pattern and the second wiring pattern, respectively. Since there is no need to branch the data bus to the first surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

The gaming machine (10) of feature part 053SG is,
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. including a data bus that is
a first input that transmits input data based on an input signal from a first electronic component (first input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer); A circuit (first input circuit) and input data based on input signals from a second electronic component (second input component) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are input to the control means (microcomputer for game control). A second input circuit (second input circuit) transmits to the microcomputer) and a third electronic component (first output component, second output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). an output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the component);
The first input circuit (first input circuit) and the output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) are connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) via the data bus,
The second input circuit (second input circuit) is characterized in that it is connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) without going through the data bus.
According to this feature, the input data based on the input signal from the second electronic component is transmitted to the control means without going through the data bus through which input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Therefore, input data based on important input signals can be transmitted to the control means without being influenced by input data from other input circuits or output data to the output circuit.

The gaming machine (11) of feature part 053SG is,
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. including a data bus that is
The output circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the input circuit.
According to this feature, the output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means outputs the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means. Since the output data is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the input circuit that transmits data to the control means, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine (12) of feature part 053SG is,
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. including a data bus that is
The output circuit outputs an output to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). A first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs a signal, and a second electronic component (second output circuit) that performs display according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component);
The second output circuit (second output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the first output circuit (first output circuit). It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the second electronic component that performs display according to the progress of the game is connected to the first electronic component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since it is connected to the data bus in such a way that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the first output circuit that outputs the output signal, the output data is not affected by noise, etc., so the display changes depending on the progress of the game. can be prevented from affecting.

In the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of game balls may be placed inside the game machine. The ball is recyclably enclosed, and the number of balls lent out in response to a player's loan request and the number of prize balls given in response to winnings are added up, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which games are stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, scores and points are awarded to the player instead of game balls, so these awarded scores and points correspond to the gaming value.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. A storage part (e.g., ball tank forming part 201) that can store game media (e.g., game balls P), a payout part (e.g., payout device 200) that can pay out game media, and an upper surface. A guiding passage forming part (for example, a first guiding passage forming part 202 or a second guiding passage) that opens and forms a guiding passage (for example, a first guiding passage or a second guiding passage) that guides game media in the storage part to the dispensing part. 2 guiding passage forming part 204), and a cover part (for example, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, a third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guiding passage forming part. , the cover part has a predetermined restriction part (for example, a predetermined restricting part) for restricting the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover part from falling into the guide passage forming part. , elongated holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and a recess 336) (see FIGS. 22 and 24), and the guide passage forming part is provided with screw members that have fallen into the guiding passage forming part to the dispensing part. A plurality of specific restriction parts (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided for restricting the movement of the cover (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 27), and the predetermined restriction part is provided with a A first retaining portion (e.g., long holes 316A to 316C) and a second retaining portion (e.g., groove 326A to 326C), the second retention part is provided at a position closer to the dispensing part (for example, the dispensing device 200) than the first retention part, and is larger than the first retention part (L22B> L21), furthermore, a light emitting means that can emit light (e.g., main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F), and a specific display corresponding to the variable display (e.g., pending display). display means (e.g., image display device 5) that can display the specific display (e.g., active display), and a specific display effect (e.g., , a part that displays a pending display or an active display in any one of display patterns α to display patterns γ), and a specific light emission effect that causes the light emitting means to emit light (for example, a flash effect when winning a prize). (for example, a performance control CPU 120), and the performance execution means is arranged so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display performance. (For example, as shown in FIG. 40-28, FIG. 40-29(A) to FIG. 40-32(H), and FIG. 40-49(A) to FIG. 40-50(D). , the part where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on before the display of the pending display is completed), the state is more advantageous when the specific light emitting effect is executed than when the specific light emitting effect is not executed. (For example, as shown in Figure 40-24, when a flash effect is executed at the time of winning, the rate of control is high in the jackpot game state than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning.) ), the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g. winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g. main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, a movable lamp 9d), and the first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term to the time of winning the previous term). a second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize to the time when the flash effect at the time of winning a prize) (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-28, the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light in a manner that corresponds to the specific light-emitting performance (for example, as shown in FIG. During the performance execution period, the part flashes at a brightness C1 and a period T1, and during the flash performance execution period at the time of a late winning flash, the part flashes at a brightness C2 and a period T2), the second light emitting means, during the first period It emits light in a manner that corresponds to the specific light emission effect, and it emits light in a manner that corresponds to the variable display that is being executed in the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-28, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b , the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d blink at a brightness of C1 and a cycle of T1 during the execution period of the first-term winning flash effect, and blink at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T0 during the second-term winning flash effect. (Part) Gaming machines can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part can be prevented from falling into the guide passage forming part. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide passage forming section from entering the dispensing section. Moreover, since the screw member becomes more likely to be retained in the retention part as it approaches the dispensing part, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part from moving and falling into the guide passage forming part. In addition, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and in the first period of the specific light emission effect, By causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, it is possible to make the specific light emitting effect more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for players to recognize.

In other words, by preventing the screw members from falling or getting mixed into the guide passage forming part or the payout part, the gaming machine can be made less prone to malfunctions, and is also subject to specific light emitting effects depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. It is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the specific display is easy for the player to recognize. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is unlikely to malfunction when installed in a gaming parlor and whose effects are easy to understand for players.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can prevent screw members from falling or getting mixed into the guide path forming part or the payout part, and also makes it easier for players to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. , a gaming machine (e.g., Pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and including a light emitting means (e.g., a main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F), and a display means (for example, image display device 5) and a specific display effect that displays the specific display (for example, display pattern α to display pattern γ of pending display or active display) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, occurrence of a starting prize). and a specific light emitting effect (for example, a flash effect when winning a prize) that causes the light emitting means to emit light (for example, a flash effect when winning a prize); The effect executing means executes the specific light emitting effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, in FIG. 28. As shown in Figures 40-29 (A) to 40-32 (H), and Figures 40-49 (A) to 40-50 (D), winnings begin before the pending display is completed. (for example, the part that lights up the flash lamp 135SG009F), the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-24). As shown, when the winning flash effect is executed, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the winning flash effect is not executed), and the light emitting means is a first light emitting means (for example, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F), and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, a movable body lamp 9d), and the first light emitting means The means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period) and from the predetermined timing. In the second period up to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting performance (for example, the period from the start of the flash performance at the time of winning in the latter half to the start timing of the reach-to-reach performance of the variable display that is the target of the flash performance at the time of winning). It emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light at a brightness of C1 and a period of T1 during the execution period of the previous winning flash effect). (a part that flashes at a brightness of C2 and a period of T2 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the second period), the second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d emit light in a manner according to the variable display being executed in the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-28, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are (During the execution period of the flash effect, the part flashes at a brightness of C1 and a period of T1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of late prize winning, the part flashes at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0.) Below is an example of the form of these gaming machines. will be explained as another example.

(form)
The gaming machine of form A1 is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., pending display and active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A specific display effect that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a part that displays a pending display or an active display in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ) , a specific display display start effect) and a specific light emission effect that causes the light emitting means to emit light (for example, a flash effect when winning a prize);
Equipped with
The effect executing means executes the specific light emitting effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIG. -28, as shown in Figures 40-29(A) to 40-32(H), and 40-49(A) to 40-50(D), before the display of the pending display is completed. The part that lights up the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning a prize),
The rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emitting effect is executed than when the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-24, when the winning flash effect is executed, (If the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning, the percentage of control to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed)
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g. winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g. main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body). lamp 9d);
The first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous period winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous period winning flash effect); A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start timing of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has a brightness of C1 and (The part that blinks at cycle T1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the brightness is C2 and blinks at cycle T2),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner according to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, in FIG. 40-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d flash at a brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. During the period, the part blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0).
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect In this case, the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous by causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the specific display.

The gaming machine of form A2 is the gaming machine described in form A1,
The specific display effect is performed by an appearance effect section (for example, FIG. 40-15, FIG. 40-30(D) to FIG. 40-32(H), FIG. 40-49(B)) where the appearance effect of the specific display is executed. ~As shown in Figure 40-50 (D), when the performance control CPU 120 executes the specific display display start performance execution process, an appearance animation in which the pending display and active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top is displayed. part), and a periodic effect part (for example, FIG. 40-15, FIG. 40-30 (D) to As shown in FIG. 40-32 (H), FIG. 40-49 (B) to FIG. (The part where the display is displayed as a rotating animation)
The timing when the display of the specific display is completed is the start timing of the periodic effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 and 40-20, from the timing when the appearance animation of the pending display or active display is completed, (The part where the rotation animation of these pending and active displays starts)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the specific display.

The gaming machine of form A3 is the gaming machine described in form A1 or form A2,
The effect execution means can start the specific light emission effect before the start of the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-29(A) to 40-32(H), When executing display start effect B, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp, etc. are activated as a winning flash effect from a timing before the display start of the pending display or active display. (The part where the body lamp 9d emits light)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the specific light emission effect is started before the start of the specific display effect, the specific light emission effect can be made more conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form A4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A3,
The specific display effect includes an appearance effect in which the specific display appears (for example, a specific display start effect),
The display means displays the specific display in a plurality of different display modes (for example, a specific display display start effect A that only performs an appearance animation in which a pending display or an active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top, and a first display mode in which the character A is It can be displayed in specific display display start effect B) that executes an appearance animation in which the pending display and active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top after acting on the pending memory display area 135SG005D and the active display area 135SG005A,
The period of the appearance effect varies depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, specific display display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, specific display display start effect B is 1.2 seconds),
The specific light emission effect is started before the end timing of the shortest appearance effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-28 and 40-49(A) to 40-50(D) , the part where the winning flash effect starts before the end timing of the specific display display start effect A)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of the display mode of the specific display, the specific light emission effect can be started before the appearance effect ends, so that the player can surely see the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. Recognizable.

The gaming machine of form A5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A4,
The effect executing means starts the specific light emitting effect after once controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to a low brightness state (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-28, FIG. 40-29(A), 40-29(B), FIG. 40-49(A), and FIG. 40-49(B), when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F , the part that turns off the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission performance.
Note that the "low brightness state" in the present invention includes not only a state in which light is emitted at low brightness but also a state in which no light is emitted.

The gaming machine of form A6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A5,
The effect execution means starts the specific light emitting effect after once controlling the display means to a low visibility state (for example, as shown in Modification Example 135SG-11, when executing a flash effect at the time of winning, the image (The part that starts the flash effect at the time of winning after reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 by reducing the brightness of the backlight etc. built into the display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission performance.
Note that the "low visibility state" in the present invention refers to a state in which the visibility of the display means is lower than the previous state, and the visibility of the display is reduced by a method other than reducing the brightness of the display means. It also includes a degraded state.

The gaming machine of form A7 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A6,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a preview effect) that suggests that the variable display will be controlled in an advantageous state while executing the variable display, and is capable of executing a suggestive effect that indicates that the variable display will be controlled in an advantageous state. The specific light emitting effect can be executed even when the As shown in (n), the part where the winning flash effect can be executed depending on whether the preview effect is being executed or not),
A variable display compatible sound corresponding to the variable display (the variable display compatible sound shown in FIG. 40-28), a suggestive performance compatible sound corresponding to the suggestive performance (the preview performance compatible sound shown in FIG. 40-29(A)), A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect (sound corresponding to the winning flash effect shown in FIG. 40-29(B)),
The sound output means includes:
When the specific light emitting effect is executed while the variable display compatible sound is being output, the specific light emitting effect compatible sound can be output with priority over the variable display compatible sound that is being output (for example, As shown in FIG. 40-29 (B), when executing the winning flash effect while the variable display is being executed, the variable display compatible sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. part that outputs sound at volume V1 (V1>V2)),
When the specific light emitting effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect being output (for example, As shown in FIG. 40-29(B), when the winning flash effect is executed during the execution of the preview effect, the sound corresponding to the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. The part that outputs the sound at volume V1 (V1>V2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the sound corresponding to the variable display or the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect is output, the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be easily heard, and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect allows the player to execute the specific light emission effect. It becomes easier to recognize.

The gaming machine of form A8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A7,
Equipped with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) capable of outputting sound,
The effect executing means outputs a sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect from the sound output means before the completion of the display of the specific display and the light emission of the light emitting means in the specific light emitting effect (for example, FIG. 40-28 , As shown in Figures 40-29(A) to 40-32(H), and Figures 40-49(A) to 40-50(D), execution of the winning flash effect is determined in response to the starting winning. (If this is the case, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect will start from the speakers 8L and 8R, and then the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will start, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display will be completed.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the predetermined condition is met by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A7,
Equipped with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) capable of outputting sound,
In the specific light emission effect, the effect execution means includes:
A sound corresponding to a specific light emission effect can be output from the sound output means (for example, a part capable of outputting a sound corresponding to a flash effect when winning a prize from speakers 8L and 8R),
The light emitting means is caused to emit light before the completion of the display of the specific display and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-12, execution of a winning flash effect in response to a winning start) If it is determined, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display is completed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can quickly recognize that the predetermined condition has been met by the light emitted from the light emitting means, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A9,
The specific light emitting effect is such that during the first period, the first light emitting means emits light in a predetermined manner that corresponds to the specific light emitting effect, and during the second period, the first light emitting means emits light in a predetermined manner that is more emphasized than the predetermined manner. This is a performance that emits light in a specific manner with a low degree of intensity (for example, as shown in Figure 40-28, during the execution period of the first-term winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at brightness C1, During the execution period of the time flash effect, the part where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 (C1>C2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by causing at least the first light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined manner, the player can be made aware of the start of a specific light emitting effect, and the first light emitting means continues to emit light in a predetermined manner during the second period as well. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting due to the light emitting and interfering with other effects.
Note that the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" in the present invention includes a low-speed blinking mode in which the degree of emphasis is low due to a slow blinking speed.

The gaming machine of form A11 is the gaming machine described in form A10,
The second period includes a period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is executed, and a period during which the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is being executed (for example, in FIG. 40-28 As shown in , the execution period of the late winning flash effect includes the period during which the variable display that precedes the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, and the execution period of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect. period),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first light emitting means emits light in a specific manner before and after the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A12 is the gaming machine according to form A10 or form A11,
The first light emitting means emits light in the predetermined manner when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started, the first light emitting means emits light in the predetermined manner). When a certain variable display starts, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at a brightness of C1 and a cycle of T1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A12,
The display means displays a specific light emission effect compatible image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first display mode during the first period, and displays the specific light emission effect compatible image from the first display mode during the second period. (For example, as shown in FIG. 40-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and when the winning period in the second period is During the execution period of the flash effect, the part that displays the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the first period, the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be displayed on the display means in the first display mode to make the player recognize the start of the specific light emission effect, and in the second period, the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be displayed in the first display mode. By displaying the image compatible with the specific light emitting effect in the second display mode by the means, the display means continues to display the image compatible with the specific light emitting effect in the first display mode, which obstructs other displays and reduces the interest in the game. It is possible to suppress the decline.

The gaming machine of form A14 is the gaming machine described in form A13,
The display means displays the specific light emission compatible image in a first display mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, (a portion for displaying the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A15 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A14,
comprising a sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect corresponding to the specific light emission effect;
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first output mode during the first period, and does not output the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the second period, or outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect at a higher intensity than the first output mode. Output in the second output mode with a lower level (For example, as shown in Figure 40-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1. and during the execution period of the flash performance at the time of winning in the latter half, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output from speakers 8l and 8R at a volume of V2 (V1>V2)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the specific light emission effect has started, and it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the specific light emission effect has started. During execution, the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect is not output or is output in the second output mode, so that it is possible to suppress a decline in game interest due to other effects being obstructed by the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect. .

The gaming machine of form A16 is the gaming machine described in form A15,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13). (a part that outputs a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume of V1 when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A16,
The first light emitting means stops emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during a display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 40-69 in the modified example 135SG-1, the performance control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation command from the speakers 8L and 8R during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half.) The pattern is confirmed by stopping the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect when winning a prize, turning off the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning a prize, hiding the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5, clearing the process timer for the flash effect when winning a prize in the later period, etc. During the period, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect as the flash effect during the later period, the emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S will not be executed, and the first variable display start command will be received. Based on this, by reselecting the process table for the flash effect at the time of winning the second term and resetting and starting the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the second term, the flash effect at the time of winning the second term (flash at the time of winning the term (The part that starts the output of the sound corresponding to the performance, the emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by temporarily stopping the light emission of the light emitting means, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the variable display is continuing.

The gaming machine of form A18 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A17,
A gaming machine capable of performing a re-variable display performance (for example, a pseudo continuous performance) in which the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started until the display result is derived, and then the variable display is displayed again.
The first light emitting means is configured to respond to the specific light emitting effect during a temporary stop when a re-variable display effect is executed during the second period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect is started. (For example, as shown in FIG. 40-69 and FIG. 40-70(A) to FIG. 40-89(n) as modification example 135SG-1, the flash effect is the subject of winning.) During the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern in the variable display that is executed before the variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink at the brightness C2 and the period T2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form A19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A18,
A gaming machine capable of performing a re-variable display performance (for example, a pseudo continuous performance) in which the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started until the display result is derived, and then the variable display is displayed again.
The first light emitting means is
Even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the second period (for example, as modified example 135SG-1, FIGS. 40-69 and 40-70 (A ) ~ As shown in FIG. 40-89(n), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at the brightness C1 and the cycle T2 even during the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect),
Even during a temporary stop when the re-variable display effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the light emission continues in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as modification 135SG-1) As shown in Figures 40-69 and 40-70(A) to Figure 40-89(n), during the temporary suspension period of the decorative symbols in the variable display that are subject to the winning flash effect, the winning flash part of the lamp 135SG009F that continues to blink at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that the variable display has ended even though it is temporarily stopped.

The gaming machine of form A20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A16,
The first light emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during a display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect. (For example, as shown in Figures 40-29 (A) to 40-48 (n), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter half, before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize is started) During the previous variable display pattern confirmation period, the part where the flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink when winning a prize),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by continuing to emit light during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period, the player's expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is targeted by the specific light emitting effect. It is possible to accurately maintain the variable display until the start of the variable display, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A21 is the gaming machine described in form A20,
The display means is capable of variably displaying first performance identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) and variable display of second performance identification information (for example, a small pattern) whose visibility is lower than that of the first performance identification information. A gaming machine,
During the result display period, the second performance identification information in a stopped state is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-33 (J), during the pattern confirmation period, small symbols are displayed variably. (the part displayed when the is stopped),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the light emission continues during the result display period, the second performance identification information in the stopped state is displayed, so the player can be made aware that it is the result display period.

The gaming machine of form A22 is the gaming machine described in form A21,
The display means can display a specific light emission performance corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emission performance in the second period so as not to overlap with the display of the second performance identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-33 (J) As shown in FIG. 3, while the winning flash effect is being executed, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5. 1 display area 135SG005F (part displayed at the left end),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the end of the variable display due to the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect being displayed overlappingly with the display of the second effect identification information.

The gaming machine of form A23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A22,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance (for example, a reach performance of super reach) that suggests control to be in an advantageous state,
When the specific effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the first light emitting means emits light in a manner according to the specific light emission effect until the specific effect is started, and When the performance starts, it starts emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific performance (for example, as shown in Figure 40-90 as modification 135SG-2, the super reach that is the target of the flash performance when winning is variable). In the display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at a brightness of C2 and cycle T2 before the start of the super reach reach effect, and from the start timing of the super reach reach effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at a brightness of C2. part to light),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the specific performance is started, the light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific performance instead of in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission performance, so that the game interest of the specific performance can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A24 is the gaming machine described in form A23,
The display means is capable of displaying a specific effect start image corresponding to the start of the specific effect when the specific effect is started (for example, FIG. 40-96(K) to FIG. 40-98(O)). , as shown in FIGS. 40-104(K) to 40-106(O), a portion where the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (whiteout),
The first light emitting means enters a low brightness state when the display of the display means switches to the specific effect start image, and after entering the low brightness state, emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in 40-90, during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and then the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at brightness C2 from the start timing of the super reach reach effect.) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes with a low brightness state accompanying switching to the specific performance start image, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to these changes in the light emitting mode. Since this can be prevented, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A25 is the gaming machine described in form A23 or form A24,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The performance execution means suggests, as the specific performance, an action performance that causes the movable body to move at the start of the specific performance (for example, a movable body movement performance shown in FIGS. 40-90), and execution of the motion performance. It is possible to perform a motion suggestion performance (for example, a movable body motion suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 40-90),
The first light emitting means enters a low brightness state when executing the action suggesting effect, and after entering the low brightness state, emits light in a manner corresponding to the action effect which is a mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, , as shown in Figure 40-90, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect during the whiteout period, and the winning flash is turned off from the start timing of the super reach reach effect thereafter. The part that lights up the lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes with a low brightness state accompanying the execution of the suggestive effect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to these changes in the light emitting mode. As a result, you can increase your interest in playing games.

The gaming machine of form A26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A25,
The first light emitting means is
When a special performance different from the specific light emission performance is executed by the performance execution means, it is possible to emit light in a manner corresponding to the special performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-108(A) as modification 135SG-3). (As shown in the figure, when a step-up effect is executed during a variable display in which a winning flash effect is not being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be lit in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect).
When the specific light emitting effect is started during the execution of the special effect, the light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect with priority over a manner corresponding to the special effect (for example, modification 135SG-3 As shown in Figure 40-108(B), when performing a step-up effect during a variable display in which a winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash lamp is set in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect. 135SG009F continues to light up (flashing)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect from being started at an inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the special effect.

The gaming machine of form A27 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A26,
The first light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, when it ends at a first timing during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect, and at a second timing after the first timing. (For example, as shown in FIG. 40-119(A) and FIG. 40-119(B) as modification example 135SG-4, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F responds to the winning flash effect. The timing to end the light emitting mode is the timing to start the movable body movement performance during the variable display that is the target of the flash performance when winning a prize, and the timing to start the reach performance of super reach),
When the light emission of the first light emitting means in a manner according to the specific light emission effect ends at the first timing, and when the light emission of the first light emitting means in a manner according to the specific light emission effect ends at the second timing. The rate at which the winning state is controlled to be advantageous differs depending on the end of the game. Expectation level of jackpot in the case where the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the movable body movement performance according to the light emission mode according to the movable body movement performance, and when the light emission mode is changed according to the said reach performance from the start timing of the reach performance. (different parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the light emission ends in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A28 is the gaming machine described in form A27,
The effect executed by the effect execution means at the time of the end is different depending on when the light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at the first timing and when it ends at the second timing. (For example, as shown in FIG. 40-119 as modification example 135SG-4, during the execution period of the movable body movement effect, depending on the timing of ending the light emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, In some cases, it may be during the execution period of Super Reach's reach effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize whether the end timing is the first timing or the second timing.

The gaming machine of form A29 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A28,
The performance execution means executes a first performance (for example, a movable body movement performance shown in FIG. 40-119 as a modification example 135SG-4) and a second performance different from the first performance (for example, a modification example 135SG-4) during variable display. -4, it is possible to execute the super reach reach effect shown in Figure 40-119),
The first light emitting means is
With the execution of the first effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it is possible to change the light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to the light emission mode in a mode corresponding to the first effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 40-119(A) as modification example 135SG-4, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the start timing of the movable body movement performance. (The part that changes the lighting mode according to the motion effect),
With the execution of the second effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be changed to the light emission mode in a mode corresponding to the second effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 40-119(B) as modification example 135SG-4, the part that changes the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the start timing of the reach effect to the light emission mode according to the reach effect),
When changing from a mode of light emission corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode of light emission corresponding to the first effect, and when changing from a mode of light emission corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode of light emission corresponding to the second effect. The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled differs depending on the time (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-119(C) as a modified example 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed depending on the winning flash performance). The expectation level of jackpot is different depending on the case where the light emission mode is set from the start timing of the movable body movement performance to the light emission mode according to the movable body movement performance, and the case where the light emission mode is set from the start timing of the reach performance to the light emission mode according to the reach performance. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A30 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A28,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The performance execution means controls an action performance that causes the movable body to move (for example, a movable body motion performance), a motion suggestion performance that suggests execution of the motion performance (for example, a movable body motion suggestion performance), and an advantageous state. It is possible to carry out a specific performance (for example, a reach performance of super reach) that suggests that the
The first light emitting means is
With the execution of the action suggestion effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the light emission can change from a mode of light emission corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode corresponding to the action suggestion effect (for example, a modified example). As shown in 135SG-4, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting performance from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting performance. part to be changed),
With the execution of the specific effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it is possible to change the light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to the light emission mode in a mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, a modified example As shown in 135SG-4, a part that changes the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect from the start timing of the super reach effect. ),
The rate at which the light is controlled to an advantageous state is different when changing from the light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to the mode corresponding to the action suggestion effect and when changing to the light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, , as shown in Modified Example 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting performance according to the movable body motion suggesting performance. (The part where the jackpot expectation level differs depending on the lighting mode and the lighting mode depending on the reach effect from the start timing of the reach effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A31 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A30,
The display modes of the specific display include a normal mode (for example, display pattern α), a special mode (for example, display pattern δ and display pattern ε shown in FIG. 40-120 as modification 135SG-5), and a special mode (for example, display pattern β and display pattern γ).
The special aspect includes a first special aspect (for example, display pattern γ) and a second special aspect (for example, display pattern β) different from the first special aspect,
When the specific display is displayed in the first special mode, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the second special mode (for example, in FIG. 40-17 As shown in the figure, when the pending display or the active display is displayed in the display pattern γ, the part that is controlled to be in the jackpot gaming state at a higher rate than when it is displayed in the display pattern β),
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-120 as modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ or The part where the pending display or active display displayed in display pattern ε can be changed to the pending display or active display in display pattern β or display pattern γ),
When the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the percentage of execution of the specific light emitting effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 40 as Modified Example 135SG-5). As shown in 120, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, it is easier to win a prize than when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern β and the display pattern γ. (parts where flash effects are executed at a high rate),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a specific display is displayed in a special mode, by executing a specific light emitting effect at a high rate, it is determined whether the special mode changes to the first special mode or the second special mode. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to the game, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A32 is the gaming machine described in form A31,
The special mode is a mode of a specific color (for example, blinking white as shown in FIG. 40-120 as modification example 135SG-5),
The special aspect is an aspect of a special color different from the specific color (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-17, blue or red),
The normal mode is a mode of a color other than the specific color and the special color (for example, white),
The specific display of the specific color changes to the special color at a higher rate when the specific light emitting effect is being executed than when the specific light emitting effect is not being executed (for example, Modified Example 135SG-5 As shown in , when a pending display or an active display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is displayed depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is executed. parts with different rates of change to pattern β and display pattern γ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the difference in the mode of specific display can be easily understood by the difference in color, and when a specific display of a specific color is displayed, the player pays attention to whether or not a specific light emitting effect is being executed. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A33 is the gaming machine described in form A31 or form A32,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a change suggestion effect that suggests that the specific display displayed in the special mode changes to the special mode in a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode. (For example, a part where the first effect and second effect shown in Modification Example 135SG-5 can be executed),
The special mode changes to the special mode at a higher rate when the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode than when it is executed in the first mode (for example, in Modified Example 135SG-5). As shown in , the second effect can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ. The part that is a performance),
When the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode, the specific light emission effect is executed at a higher rate than when it is executed in the first mode (for example, in Modification 135SG-5). As shown, when the second effect is executed, the winning flash effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first effect is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the change suggestion effect is executed in the first mode or the second mode, and the change suggestion effect is executed in the first mode by executing the specific light emission effect. It is possible to increase expectations for the implementation in two ways.

The gaming machine of form A34 is the gaming machine described in form A33,
The special mode is a first special mode in which the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode and the rate of change to the special mode is low (for example, the display pattern δ shown in FIG. 40-120 as modification 135SG-5). ), and a second special mode in which the rate at which the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode and changes to the special mode is higher than that in the first special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-120 as modification example 135SG-5). The display pattern ε) shown in
When the specific display is displayed in the second special mode, the percentage of execution of the specific light emitting effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode (for example, when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode) When the display pattern ε is displayed, the percentage of flash effects executed at the time of winning is higher than when the specific display is displayed using the display pattern δ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the specific display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, and when the second special mode has a high rate of change to the special mode. Since the specific light emitting effect is executed at a high rate in the second special mode, the execution of the specific light emitting effect can increase expectations for the specific display to be displayed in the second special mode.

The gaming machine of form A35 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A34,
The display means is capable of displaying a specific light emitting effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the specific light emitting effect so as to overlap a specific display corresponding to a variable display of a target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, As shown in modification example 135SG-7, a silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect when winning a prize can be displayed so as to overlap the active display in the active display area 135SG005A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect can be easily recognized by the player, and the specific display can be hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, giving the player a sense of surprise and increasing the enjoyment of the game. can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A36 is the gaming machine described in form A35,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of displays corresponding to the specific light emitting effect of different types (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-7, the display means can display a plurality of displays corresponding to the specific light emitting effect of different sizes on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning). (portion where silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed),
The manner of overlapping with the specific display differs depending on the type of display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-129(L) and FIG. 40-130(N) as modification example 135SG-7). , a portion where the overlapping aspect of the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the displayed silhouette image 135SG005S)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a plurality of displays corresponding to specific light emitting effects are displayed, and the manner of overlapping with the specific display changes depending on the displayed display corresponding to specific light emitting effects, so that the game enjoyment can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A37 is the gaming machine described in form A35 or form A36,
The specific display includes a first specific display (for example, a pending display) corresponding to a variable display that has not been executed yet, and a second variable display (for example, an active display) that corresponds to a variable display that is being executed,
The display means can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap with the first specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started. In addition, during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it can be displayed so as to overlap the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in Modification Example 135SG-7, Before the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect is started, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the pending display that is the object of the winning flash effect that is displayed in the first holding memory display area 135SG005D. , during execution of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, a portion that displays the silhouette image 135SG005S so as to overlap the active display that is the target of the winning flash effect that is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first specific display and the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emission performance can be easily recognized by the player, and not only the first specific display but also the second specific display can be hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emission performance. Therefore, it is possible to provide even more surprises to the players and improve their enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of form A38 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A37,
A gaming machine capable of performing a re-variable display performance (for example, a pseudo continuous performance) in which the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started until the display result is derived, and then the variable display is displayed again.
The display means is capable of displaying a re-variable related display regarding the re-variable display performance, and also displays a specific light-emitting performance corresponding display corresponding to the specific light-emission performance during the specific light-emitting performance, overlapping with the re-variable related display. (For example, if a pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the winning flash effect, when the decorative pattern temporarily stops, it will stop in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. Special design (see Figures 40-40, etc.) where the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed overlappingly as a flash effect when winning a prize),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the re-variable related display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so it is possible to provide surprise to the player and improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A39 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A35 to A38,
The display means can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, FIG. 40-28, FIG. 40-42(a) to FIG. 40-47( As shown in l), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display that is the subject of the flash effect when winning a prize),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the interest of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A40 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A39,
The performance execution means is
Even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, the first light emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, and the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect ends at a predetermined time. It is possible to control the effect to end the light emission at the timing (for example, as shown in Figure 40-28, during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be activated before the start of the ready-to-win effect). flashes at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T2, and turns off the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the start timing of the reach effect),
If the light emission of the first light emitting means in the manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect is not terminated at the predetermined end timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the first light emitting means is not terminated at a specific end timing subsequent to the predetermined end timing. Perform special end control to end the light emission of the light emitting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-22, the performance control CPU 120 determines that it is the start timing of the ready-to-reach performance of the variable display of the performance target due to the generation of static electricity, etc.) If this is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (timing at which the symbol confirmation command is received), which is a timing later than the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect, a second-term winning flash effect including blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is performed again. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort when light emission in a mode corresponding to a specific light emission effect is not normally completed.

The gaming machine of form A41 is the gaming machine described in form A40,
Equipped with a game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
The game control means is capable of transmitting variable display end information that notifies the end of the variable display to the performance execution means when the variable display ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-4(A) , a part where the CPU 103 can send a symbol confirmation command that specifies the stop of the variable display of decorative symbols),
The performance execution means performs the specific end control based on receiving the variable display end information as the specific end timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-22, the performance control CPU 120 The part that ends the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half based on receiving the command),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further reduce the sense of discomfort when ending light emission in a manner that corresponds to a specific light emission performance.

The gaming machine of form A42 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A39 to A41,
The predetermined end timing includes a first predetermined end timing and a second predetermined end timing. (portion where flash lamp 135SG009F can stop flashing),
The specific end timing is a timing later than the predetermined end timing and the second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-4, the effect control CPU 120 may cause the performance control CPU 120 to trigger the winning flash due to the generation of static electricity, etc. If it is not possible to stop the blinking of the lamp 135SG009F, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be started again at the end timing of the variable display, which is a timing later than the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect or the start timing of the reach effect. (The part that ends the flash performance when winning a prize in the second half)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the light emission cannot be ended at the second predetermined end timing, it is possible to end the light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission performance at the specific end timing.

The gaming machine of form A43 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A42,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, a super reach performance) that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
If the predetermined condition is satisfied while the specific effect is being executed, the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. (The part that does not decide to execute the flash effect at the time of winning if a starting winning occurs in the mouth),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to a specific performance.

The gaming machine of form A44 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A43,
If the predetermined condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the variable display is equal to or shorter than the predetermined period, the effect execution means does not execute the specific light emitting effect, If the predetermined condition is satisfied for a period longer than the predetermined period, the specific light emission effect can be executed (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-8, when the first starting port is When a starting winning occurs, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is less than the execution period of the winning flash effect in the previous period, the execution of the winning flash effect is not determined),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific display of the target of the specific light emitting effect from becoming difficult to understand due to the specific light emitting effect being executed when the remaining period of the variable display is short.

The gaming machine of form A45 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A44,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests that the control will be in an advantageous state even in a variable display that is not controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-9, even in a variable display where the variable display result is a failure). The part where you can perform the super reach reach effect),
When the predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state, the specific light emitting effect can be executed in response to the start of the next variable display of the variable display (for example, a modified As shown in Example 135SG-8, if a starting winning occurs at the first starting opening while the variable display is being executed, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period. If it is less than the execution period, the winning flash effect can be executed from the start timing of the next variable display, provided that the variable display result of the variable display is a loss),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific effect and the specific light emission effect from becoming less interesting due to the specific effect and the specific light emission effect being executed overlappingly.

The gaming machine of form A46 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A45,
A specific area where the predetermined condition is satisfied when the game medium passes through (for example, the winning ball device 6A forming the first starting winning opening);
a specific light emitting means (for example, a starting port lamp 135SG009S) provided around the specific area and capable of emitting light in different light emission modes;
Equipped with
The display means can display the specific display in any one of a plurality of display modes that differ in the rate at which the specific display is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-17, a pending display or an active (a part where the display can be displayed in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ with different jackpot expectations),
The specific light emitting means is capable of emitting light in a light emission mode corresponding to the display mode of the specific display regardless of whether or not the specific light emission effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-28, When the display pattern β or the display pattern γ is determined, the starting port lamp 135SG009S starts regardless of the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a winning flash effect or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, etc. (a portion that emits light in a color according to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of a winning to the end of the variable display based on the starting winning);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific display can also be recognized by the light emission mode of the specific light emitting means provided around the specific area, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A47 is the gaming machine described in form A46,
The number of light emitting modes in which the specific light emitting means can emit light is greater than the number of light emitting modes in which the first light emitting means can emit light in the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-9, (a part where the number of light emitting modes of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission performance is greater than the number of light emitting modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash performance);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emission variations of the specific light emitting means are increased, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A48 is the gaming machine described in form A46 or form A47,
The light emitting area of the first light emitting means is larger than the light emitting area of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-10, the light emitting area where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as a winning flash effect is , a portion provided larger than the light emitting area where the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light as a lighting effect of the starting port lamp),
The period during which the specific light emitting means emits light according to the display mode of the specific display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition of No. 1 is such that the first light emitting means emits light according to the specific light emission effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. (If it is decided to execute both the winning flash effect and the pending display notice effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will emit light after the starting winning occurs.) While the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the ready-to-win display on the variable display that is the target of the start-up winning flash display, the starting exit lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the ready-to-win display that is the target of the start winning flash display, while the start exit lamp 135SG009S displays the variable display that is the target of the pending display notice display (flash display when winning) after the start winning occurs. (the part that emits light until the end of the variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decline in game interest due to excessively long execution of light emission by the first light emitting means in accordance with the specific light emitting effect, and to prevent the light emitting mode of the specific light emitting means from becoming more advantageous. Players' expectations can be maintained for a long time.

The gaming machine of form A49 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A46 to A48,
Both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means are capable of blinking light emission (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in the section where the starting port lamp 135SG009S can flash),
The flashing cycle of the first light emitting means is different from the flashing cycle of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-10, the flashing cycle of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S is set as a winning flash effect as a winning flash effect). Parts that differ from the blinking cycle of lamp 135SG009F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the blinking cycles are different, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 31 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 33). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 31, three locations on the lower left of the gaming area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), the game board 2 is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiver member. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 33), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 31, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 31) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 33).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 33).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 32 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 33, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 34, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 35 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of starting winning that is set to be transmitted in this way is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 34 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 37 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 37(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 37(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the second special figure. A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value is assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and will be controlled in a small win game state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It can also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the initial position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 38 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 39, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 135SG)
Next, the feature section 135SG (hereinafter abbreviated as main feature section 135SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 40-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 135SG. As shown in FIG. 40-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this feature section 135SG, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F imitating the character A is provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and a winning ball device 6A A starting port lamp 135SG009S for causing the winning ball device 6A (first starting port) to emit light is provided near the starting port.

Further, a stick lamp 135SG009X for causing the stick controller 31A to emit light is provided in the stick controller 31A, and a button lamp 135SG009Y for causing the push button 31B to emit light is provided in the push button 31B. These stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135Sg009Y, together with the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d, constitute the game effect lamp 9 in the main feature section 135SG.

As shown in FIG. 40-2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the starting lamp 135SG009S, the stick lamp 135SG09X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y are connected to the lamp control board 14, and are used for performance control via the lamp control board 14. It can be turned on (flashing) under control from the CPU 120.

FIG. 40-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the feature section 135SG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 in the feature section 135SG constitutes a first display area 135SG005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 includes a first reservation memory display area 135SG005D in which the number of reserved first special symbols can be displayed by the number of circular reservation displays, and a second reservation memory number of special symbols can be displayed by a circular reservation display. The second display area 135SG005Sa includes a second reserved storage display area 135SG005U that can be displayed according to the number of characters, and a telop display area 135SG005T that can display telops indicating the game status, the performance being executed, etc.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 has a fourth symbol 135SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, a display of the first special symbol pending memory number, and a display of the second special symbol pending memory number. 3 display area 135SG005Sb.

Among these, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the center of the first display area 135SG005F, and it is possible to perform variable display of decorative patterns. It has become. Moreover, a small pattern 135SG005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F. The small patterns include the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the "right" decorative pattern display areas. The symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols displayed on 5R are vertically arranged. Moreover, the small pattern 135SG005M is a pattern that is not hidden during variable display and is always displayed within the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5.

In addition, in the main feature section 135SG, as shown in FIG. It is arranged at the left end of the 1 display area 135SG005F in a smaller size than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 135SG005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 135SG005A is provided at the lower center of the first display area 135SG005F in the main feature section 135SG for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display.

Hereinafter, in this feature section 135SG, the pending display and the active display may be collectively referred to as a specific display.

FIG. 40-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in the feature section 135SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 40-4(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 40-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 40-4 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", a "big hit", or a "small hit". Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 40-4(B), command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command that indicates the predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10"), which will be described later. .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or not, the jackpot type (probable variable or non-probable variable), and a small hit as the winning determination result. . In addition, the command C6XXH is a fluctuation category command that indicates whether the random value for fluctuation pattern determination is a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern as a winning determination result. It is.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 40-4(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or some of these commands may not be included. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 40-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 40-5, in this feature section 135SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and the random number MR4 for determining the display result of the ordinary figure are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting section 135SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 40-6(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 135SG, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature section 135SG, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state. This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 135SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), there are more determination values than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 135SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 135SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability of winning, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Further, FIG. 40-6(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is the table referenced for this purpose.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this feature section 135SG, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether to control the special figure display result to a "small hit" game state as a "small hit". This is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 135SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different depending on the first special figure game and the second special figure game. There is. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed to generate the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which many game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 40-7(A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 135SG selects one of multiple jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 135SG using FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that transitions, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that transitions to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . The jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds). . In addition, in the jackpot game state of "probable variable jackpot C" and "non-probable variable jackpot", rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds). It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. Sometimes called.

Although not particularly shown, the small winning game state in the feature section 135SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. It has become. Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

The high probability control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot are continuously performed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state occurs continuously without going through the normal state. , resulting in a so-called consecutive housing situation.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature section 135SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 40-7(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special pattern game using the second special pattern, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a normal open jackpot state or a high speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds, such as "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a gaming state where game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state where few prize balls are obtained can be avoided. This makes it possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 40-7(A), the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is the same, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a fixed jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 40-8 shows a variation pattern in the main feature section 135SG. In this feature section 135SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, the normal reach variation pattern includes a normal reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect described below is not executed, and a normal reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect described below is executed once, and a common normal reach variation pattern. is now executed. Furthermore, the super reach variation pattern includes a super reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed twice, which will be described later, and a super reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect, which will be described later, is executed three times. The performance is now executed. In other words, although this feature section 135SG exemplifies a form in which only one type of reach performance is provided as a normal reach reach performance and a super reach reach performance, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a plurality of reach effects may be provided as normal reach effects and super reach effects.

Incidentally, the variation pattern in this feature section 135SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 40-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this feature section 135SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, the normal reach variation patterns in this feature section 135SG include a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is not executed, in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and variable displayed again during a variable display, and a pseudo continuous effect is executed once during a variable display. There is a variation pattern. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is not performed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Furthermore, regarding the super reach variation patterns in this feature section 135SG, there are a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during a variable display, and a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during a variable display. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a shorter special symbol variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed 3 times during the variable display. .

In addition, in this characteristic section 135SG, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

In other words, regarding the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern in this feature section 135SG, the greater the number of times the pseudo continuous performance is executed during the variable display, the higher the jackpot expectation level becomes.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, as will be described later, the type of these fluctuation patterns is determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, etc. After that, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from among the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and from these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 40-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this characteristic section 135SG. In this feature section 135SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1-time jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach pseudo-continuous performance 2-time jackpot), PB1-4 (super It is determined from the variable pattern of reach pseudo consecutive performance 3 times jackpot). In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table B to change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern), PB1 Determined from -2 (Normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 1 time jackpot variation pattern), PB1-3 (Normal reach pseudo continuous performance 2 time jackpot variation pattern), PB1-4 (Normal reach pseudo continuous performance 3 time jackpot variation pattern) .

As shown in FIG. 40-9, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B have different determination ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, Determine PB1-4 at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 20%. 4 at a rate of 45%. In other words, in this feature section 135SG, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot. Furthermore, when paying attention to the number of times pseudo-continuous effects are executed, when the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot, it is easier to execute many pseudo-continuous effects during the variable display than when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot. There is. Therefore, this feature section 135SG allows the player to pay attention to the variation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo continuous performance.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special win fluctuation pattern determination table, and use the special win fluctuation pattern determination table to determine the fluctuation pattern as PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern). do.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for miss, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), and PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1-time variation variation pattern). ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns into PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern with one miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance). ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns into PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern with one miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance). ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using fluctuation pattern determination table C, change the fluctuation patterns into PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern with one miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance). ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. (time-saving shortening variation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), PA2-2 (variation pattern with 1 miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo-continuous performance 2 times) It is determined from PA2-4 (variation pattern of failure of 3 times of super reach pseudo consecutive performance).

In other words, when the variable display result in this feature section 135SG is "off", the special figure is displayed based on the fact that the number of pending memory of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or that the time is shortened. The rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1). This makes it possible to prevent the game from being delayed and shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

The RAM 102 in the feature section 135SG includes a game control data holding area 135SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 135SG150 shown in FIG. , a game control timer setting section 135SG153, a game control counter setting section 135SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 135SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , and are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 135SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B indicates that although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 135SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern holding storage section 135SG151C stores the holding information of the normal pattern game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the common figure reservation storage unit 135SG151C associates the game balls with the pending numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 135SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 135SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 135SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 135SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 135SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, numerical data indicating random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, random numbers MR2 to MR4, is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section 135SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 135SG190 as shown in FIG. It is being The performance control data holding area 135SG190 shown in FIG. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 135SG191 includes multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting section 135SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section 135SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 135SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 135SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section 135SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 135SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 135SG, data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A as shown in FIG. 40-11(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section 135SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) is provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) is provided. When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 135SG194A are an area for storing these starting opening winning designation commands and a storage area for storing the symbol designating commands. Indicates the storage area, the area to store the variable category designation command, the area to store the pending storage number notification command, the area to store the pending display flag, and whether or not it is subject to the winning flash effect described later. A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the winning flash performance target flag and the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory in association with the number of pending memories. ing.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The content (data) of the pending memory for which the start condition has been met is copied to the active display buffer 135SG194B in FIG. will be deleted. Then, the storage contents of storage areas lower than the deleted reserved storage are shifted one by one to the storage areas above.

As described above, when the variable display of the pending memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is started, the active display buffer 135SG194B stores the content of the pending memory (for which the start condition is satisfied). Since the data) is copied, as shown in FIG. 40-11(C), a storage area similar to the starting winning reception command buffer 135SG194A is provided. In other words, there is an area for storing the starting opening winning designation command, an area for storing the symbol designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the pending storage number notification command, and an area for storing the pending display flag. , and an area for storing a winning flash effect flag indicating whether or not the winning flash effect is to be performed, which will be described later.

In this feature section 135SG, if a starting winning occurs when the variable display is not being executed and there is no pending memory, a starting opening winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a holding The storage number notification command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B without passing through the reception command buffer 135SG194A at the time of starting winning. In addition, the suspension display flag is set by the performance control CPU 120 executing a prefetch notice setting process (S161) to be described later.

The stored contents of the active display buffer 135SG194B are cleared (deleted) in the special figure waiting process executed when the variable display ends.

Note that the pending display flag is a flag indicating a display mode of an active display corresponding to a pending display or a variable display in progress. Although the details will be described later, in this feature section 135SG, it is possible to suggest the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state by the display mode of these pending display and active display (value of the pending display flag).

Next, the starting winning determination process of the main feature section 135SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 36 will be explained based on FIG. 40-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the state is the same (step 135 SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 135SGS101a; Y), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 135SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 135SG154, for example. When the first special symbol pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 135SG155 is set to "1" ( Step 135SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step 135SGS101a (step 135SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value in step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state ( Step 135SGS101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the on state (step 135SGS101b; Y), the number of second special figure pending memories, which is the number of pending memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 135SGS105). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 135SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 135SGS105 (step 135SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 135SG155 is set to "2" ( Step 135SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of step 135SGS103 and step 135SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 135SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (step 135SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 135SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step 135SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154. Numerical data indicating a random number MR2 for use and a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted (step 135SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage section according to the starting opening buffer value (step 135SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section 135SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage section 135SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 135SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 135SGS110, transmission settings of a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (step 135SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 34 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the process of step 135SGS111, winning random value determination process is executed (step 135SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending storage number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. Settings are made for this purpose (step 135 SGS 113). The reservation memory number notification command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 35 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 135SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS115), and then the process of step 135SGS104 is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 135SGS114; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS116), and then the starting winning prize is Finish the process. Thereby, even if both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 40-13(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS112 of FIG. 40-12 as the winning random value determination process. In this feature section 135SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 36) is performed to treat the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbol) as a "jackpot". A determination is made as to whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 36), a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value judgment process of step 135SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol is determined to be stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach is determined. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is decided whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "jackpot" or which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result, the production control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-read preview effect is executed.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 40-13(A), the CPU 103 first checks the status of the time saving flag and probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting section 135SG152, etc. The current gaming state in machine 1 is specified (step 135SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability state is in the variable probability state when the variable probability flag is in the on state, and specifies that the state is in the shortened time state when the variable variable probability flag is in the off state and the time saving flag is in the on state, and when both the variable variable flag and the time saving flag are in the state When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 135SGS121, special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 40-6 is selected and set (step 135SGS122). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 135SGS109 of FIG. 40-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 135SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" in the special figure display result judgment table 1 selected by the process of step 135SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 uses the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to determine the presence or absence of a judgment value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 135SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the variable display (step 135SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 40-6 2 is selected and set (step 135 SGS124). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 135SGS109 of FIG. 40-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 135SGS125).

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a small hit in the variable display (step 135SGS125; Y), the variable display result will be a "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the 6th symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command according to the result (step 135SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 135SGS127), and proceed to step 135SGS138. .

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if the variable display result is a "miss" in the variable display, a symbol will be displayed according to the variable display result being a "miss". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command, is executed (step 135SGS128), and it is determined whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (step 135SGS128). 135SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 135SGS129; N), select and set the variation pattern determination table A for failure, and if the time saving flag is on (step 135SGS129; Y), determine the variation pattern for failure. Table D is selected and set (step 135SGS131). The error variation pattern determination table A is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. Further, the losing variation pattern determination table D is a losing variation pattern determining table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is being executed.

In addition to these fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure and fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure, this feature section 135SG also stores fluctuation pattern determination table B for failure, which is used when the number of pending memories is three. , an error variation pattern determination table C used when the number of pending memories is 4 is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. 40-9, among these error variation pattern determination tables A to C. , In the variation pattern determination table A for misses, 600 judgment values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation patterns within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take, and In the fluctuation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern out of the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take, and the fluctuation pattern determination table for outliers is assigned. In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern out of the possible range of the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for losing, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach fluctuation pattern out of the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take. .

For this reason, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure in step 135SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach will always be non-reach or super reach even if the number of retained memories changes after the determination. Since this is a fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for losing is used to determine the starting winning time.

In addition, if it is determined in step 135SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a jackpot during variable display (step 135SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 40-13 (A), , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 135 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from table data configuring the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot B, and the third symbol specification command if it is a probability variable jackpot C. executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the 5th symbol designation command (step 135 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot. (Step 135 SGS134). If the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 135SGS134; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as the table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 135SGS135), and step Proceed to 135SGS138.

Further, when the determined jackpot type is a variable probability jackpot (step 135SGS134; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set (step 135SGS136), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS138.

After executing any of the processes in step 135SGS127, step 135SGS130, step 135SGS131, step 135SGS135, and step 135SGS136, each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and a numerical value indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are Using the data, a fluctuation category is determined according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3 (step 135 SGS138). In this feature section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 40-13(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" regardless of the total number of pending memories. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "Super Reach", a variable category of "Other" that is a variable display mode other than "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach), It is sufficient if it can be determined based on the random value MR3 whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a variable category designation command according to the determination result of the process of step 135SGS138 to the performance control board 12 (step 135SGS139), and then the winning random number value determination process is ended.

FIG. 40-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 38 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. It is determined whether there is a command (step 135 SGS 221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 135SGS221; N), the command analysis process ends.

If there is a received command in step 135SGS221 (step 135SGS221; Y), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first starting opening winning designation command, for example by checking the MODE data of the received command. (Step 135 SGS222).

If the received command is not the first starting slot winning designation command at step 135SGS222 (step 135SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second starting slot winning designation command (step 135SGS224).

If the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command at step 135SGS224 (step 135SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command (step 135SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command at step 135SGS226 (step 135SGS226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 135SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command in step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS228).

If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command at step 135SGS228 (step 135SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230).

If the received command in step 135SGS222 is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS222; Y), or if the receiving command in step 135SGS224 is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224; Y), in step 135SGS226 If the received command is a symbol designation command (step 135SGS226; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; Y), then in step 135SGS228, the received command is the first pending storage number notification command. (135SGS228; Y), and if the received command in step 135SGS230 is the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230; Y), the received command is transferred to the start winning command buffer 135SG194A shown in FIG. 40-11. It is stored at the beginning of the free area in the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS233), and the process returns to step 135SGS221.

Specifically, in step 135SGS233, if there is no pending memory and variable display is not being executed, the received command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B, and if there is pending memory or variable display is not being executed, the received command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B. , the received command may be stored at the beginning of the free area in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A.

In addition, if a pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) is received together with a variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command), , the pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A. That is, it is only necessary to sequentially store the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of a starting winning from the beginning of the empty area in the starting winning receiving command buffer 135SG194A.

If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in step 135SGS230 (step 135SGS230; N), settings are made in accordance with other received commands (step 135SGS234), and the process returns to step 135SGS221.

In addition, in the command analysis process of this feature section 135SG, if the received command is any one of the starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category command, and pending storage number notification command, the received command is used at the starting winning time. Although an example is given in which the received command is sequentially stored from the beginning of the free space of the received command buffer 135SG194A, the present invention is not limited to this. If the received command is the 1st starting slot winning designation command, the command is used to notify the number of pending storage numbers. If a timer is set to wait for the reception of the number of pending memories, and if no pending memory number notification command is received before the timer times out, the pending memory of the entry that has not received the number of pending memory notification commands will be processed as described below. It may be set to be excluded from the reading preview performance.

Next, the production control process processing in the feature section 135SG will be explained. As shown in FIG. 40-15, in the production control process processing, the production control CPU 120 executes the prefetch notice setting process (step S161), and then displays the active display area 135SG005A, the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, and the second pending display area 135SG005A. A specific display start performance execution process (step 135SGS162) is executed to execute a specific display display start performance as a display start animation of the pending display in the storage display area 135SG005U and a display start animation of the active display in the active display area 135SG005A. In addition, after the specific display display start performance execution process, the performance control CPU 120 performs a winning flash performance execution process (step 135SGS163) to execute a winning flash performance after the specific display display start performance described above is completed. To execute a specific display rotation display effect (see Figures 40-19 (B-1) to Figure 40-19 (B-4)) as a rotation animation according to the value of the display mode flag of the pending display or active display. In the specific display rotating display effect execution process (step 135SGS164), when it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect as a pre-read notice in this feature section 135SG, a variable display based on the pending memory that is the target of the pending display notice effect is executed. A starting exit lamp light emitting performance execution process (step 135SG165) for executing a starting exit lamp light emitting performance that causes the starting exit lamp 135SG009S to emit light in a color corresponding to the display mode of the hold display/active display based on the hold memory until the end of the process (step 135SG165) and executes any one of steps S170 to S177.

Note that the specific display rotating display effect execution processing in this feature section 135SG includes processing for shifting each pending display to the next display position and displaying it as a rotating animation based on the start of the variable display, and processing for displaying the pending display as an active display. It also includes processing for shifting to the display area 135SG005A and displaying it as a rotating animation.

FIG. 40-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 161 of FIG. 40-15 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the prefetch notice setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A or the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS240) to determine whether there is an entry for which the display mode flag is not set. Determination is made (step 135SGS241). If there is no entry for which the display mode flag is not set (Step 135SGS241; N), the prefetch notice setting process ends; if there is an entry for which the display mode flag is not set (Step 135SGS241; Y), the prefetch notice setting process is already displayed. It is determined whether there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display preview effect as a pre-read preview effect is already being executed (step 135 SGS242). .

If there is no entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; N), it is further determined whether the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small hit (step 135SGS243). If the symbol designation command of the entry does not indicate a small hit (Step 135SGS243; N), the variable display result is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (Step 135SGS244a), and the variable category is specified from the fluctuation category command of the entry. (Step 135SGS244b). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending display preview effect and the display pattern based on the specified variable display result and variable category (step 135SGS245).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 40-17, if the variable display result is off and the variable category is non-reach, there is a 95% chance that the pending display notice effect will not be executed (either pending display or active display). The display mode is decided to be the display pattern α) which is white, and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect at a rate of 5% using the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or active display is blue), and 0%. It is decided to execute the hold display preview performance in the display pattern γ (the display mode of hold display or active display is red) at a ratio of .

In addition, if the variable display result is a failure and the variable category is other (normal reach), 80% of the time the pending display notice effect will not be executed (the display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or active display is white) ), it is decided to execute the pending display preview effect at a rate of 20% in the display pattern β (the display mode of pending display or active display is blue), and the display pattern to display the pending display notice effect at a rate of 0%. It is decided to execute the process in γ (the display mode of pending display or active display is red).

In addition, if the variable display result is a failure and the variable category is super reach, there is a 65% chance that the pending display notice effect will not be executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or active display is white). It was decided to execute the pending display preview effect at a rate of 25% in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or active display is blue), and at a rate of 10%, the pending display preview effect was executed in the display pattern γ ( It is decided to execute the display mode of the pending display or active display in red).

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided that the pending display preview effect will not be executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or active display is white) at a rate of 15%, and at a rate of 30%. It has been decided to execute the pending display preview effect in display pattern β (display mode of pending display or active display is blue), and the pending display preview effect is executed in display pattern γ (display mode of pending display or active display) at a rate of 55%. (in red).

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, when the pending display and active display are displayed in red, the probability that the target variable display result will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is highest, and when the pending display and active display are displayed in white. It is set so that the probability of the target variable display result being a loss is highest when the result is the highest (Jackpot expectation level according to the display color of the pending display or active display: red > blue > white).

Returning to FIG. 40-16, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the pending display preview performance in step 135SGS245 (step 135SGS246). If it is decided in step 135SGS245 to execute the pending display preview effect (step 135SGS246; Y), a value (“1” or “2”) corresponding to the determined display pattern is set in the display mode flag of the entry ( Step 135SGS247), the prefetch notice setting process ends.

In addition, if there is an entry whose display mode flag is already set to "1" or "2" (Step 135SGS242; Y), if the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small hit (Step 135SGS243; Y) If it is decided not to execute the pending display preview effect (step 135SGS246; N), set the display mode flag of the entry to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the ``drill'' display preview effect (step 135SGS248); The prefetch notice setting process ends.

Note that this feature section 135SG exemplifies a form that can be executed as a pending display preview performance by combining a pre-read preview performance that determines the display format of the pending display and a performance that determines the display format of the active display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to separately execute the pre-read preview effect that determines the display mode of the pending display and the effect that determines the display mode of the active display as different effects. good.

FIG. 40-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS162 of FIG. 40-15 as the specific display display start effect execution process. In the specific display display start performance execution process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether either the specific display display start performance A or the specific display display start performance B is being executed (step 135SGS251). In addition, whether or not specific display display start effect A or specific display display start effect B is being executed is determined by the process timer for specific display display start effect A or the process timer for specific display display start effect B, which will be described later. The determination may be made based on whether or not it is in operation.

If the specific display display start performance A or the specific display display start performance B is not being executed (step 135SGS251; N), it is determined whether the start winning designation command is received (whether the starting winning designation command reception flag is set or not). (step 135 SGS 252). If the start winning designation command is not received (step 135SGS252; N), the specific display display start performance execution process is ended. In addition, if a starting winning designation command has been received (step 135SGS252; Y), a newly generated pending memory entry is identified by referring to the starting winning receiving command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B ( 263SGS273), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is reserved (step 135SGS253a). It should be noted that whether or not it is the first special figure pending storage may be determined based on the starting opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry (identified entry) is not the first special figure pending memory (step 135SGS253a; N), the process advances to step 135SGS255, and if the entry is the first special figure pending memory (step 135SGS253a; Y), the specified entry is It is determined whether or not the display mode flag of the entered entry is 0, that is, whether or not this entry is the target of the pending display preview effect (step 135SGS254). If the display mode flag of the specified entry is 0, that is, if the entry is not the target of the pending display preview performance (step 135SGS254; Y), the process advances to step 135SGS255.

In the process of step 135SGS255, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table for specific display display start effect A according to the display position of the specific display (pending display or active display). Then, a process timer for specific display display start effect A is started (step 135SGS256).

In addition, if the display mode flag of the specified entry is not 0, that is, if the entry is the target of the pending display preview effect (step 135SGS254; N), the display position of the specific display (pending display or active display) The corresponding process table for specific display display start effect B is selected (step 135SGS257). Then, a process timer for specific display display start performance B is started (step 135SGS258).

After executing step 135SGS256 or step 135SGS258, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device according to the contents of the process data 1 of the set specific display start effect process table (step 135SGS259), and executes the specific display start effect execution process. finish.

Further, when the specific display display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B is being executed (Step 135SGS251; Y), the CPU 120 for effect control controls the specific display display start effect process timer (Specific display display start effect) -1 the value of the process timer for production A or the process timer for specific display display start production B) (step 135SGS260), and the process timer for specific display display start production with the value -1 (the process timer for specific display display start production that is currently being executed). It is determined whether the process timer) has timed out (step 135SGS261). If the process timer for the specific display display start performance that is being executed does not time out (step 135SGS261; N), the production device is controlled in accordance with the process data of the process timer for the specific display display start performance that is currently being executed. (Step 135SGS262), the specific display display start effect execution process ends.

In addition, if the process timer for the specific display display start effect that is being executed times out (step 135SGS261; Y), whether the process timer for the specific display display start effect is the last specific display start effect process timer or not. (Step 135SGS263). When the last specific display display start effect process timer times out (step 135SGS263; Y), the specific display display start effect is ended (step 135SGS267), and the specific display display start effect execution process is ended. If the process timer for the last specific display start effect has not timed out (step 135SGS263; N), the process data is switched, the process timer for the next specific display start effect is started, and the process timer for the next specific display start effect is started. The presentation device is controlled in accordance with the process data of the display start presentation process timer (step 135SGS264, step 135SGS265, step 135SGS266), and the specific display display start presentation execution process is ended.

As described above, in this feature section 135SG, if a starting prize has occurred and it is decided not to perform a pre-read preview performance (pending display preview performance) based on the starting winning, or if the starting winning is the second In the case of a starting prize in the starting opening, as shown in Figure 40-19 (A), Figure 40-19 (B), Figure 40-19 (B-1) to Figure 40-19 (B-4). , at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the active display area 135SG005A or the pending memory display areas 135SG005D, 135SG005U, an appearance animation in which the pending display (active display) gradually appears from the bottom to the top is displayed as the specific display display start effect A. Ru.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, the period from the occurrence of a starting prize to the end of the appearance animation of the pending display (active display) as the specific display display start effect A is approximately 0.2 seconds. Then, the pending display (active display) after the end of the specific display display start effect A is the same as the other pending displays and active displays as the above-mentioned specific display rotation display effect, in the active display area 135SG005A or in the pending memory display area 135SG005D, 135SG005U. Shifts to a rotating animation display.

In addition, if a starting prize has occurred, and it has been decided to execute a pre-read notice performance (pending display notice performance) based on the starting prize, and the starting prize is a starting prize in the first starting gate, As shown in FIGS. 40-20(A) to 40-20(C) and FIGS. 40-20(C-1) to 40-20(C-4), first, as specific display display start effect B, On the image display device 5, an animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed. After the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the variable display is executed at the timing of the start winning, or if the first special figure pending memory already exists, the character A An animation of moving to the 1 pending storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. At this time, character A is displayed overlapping a part of active display area 135SG005A in the process of moving to first reserved storage display area 135SG005D.

Then, when the character A moves to the first reservation memory display area 135SG005D, as shown in FIGS. 40-20 (C-1) to 40-20 (C-4), the character A An animation that attacks (acts on) the position where the hold display is displayed is displayed. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which a hold display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In this feature section 135SG, the period from the occurrence of a starting prize to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the position where the pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed as the specific display display start effect B is The duration is approximately 1 second, and the period from the end of the animation to the end of the appearance animation of the suspended display is approximately 0.2 seconds. In other words, when performing specific display display start effect B targeting the pending display of the first special drawing, it takes 1.2 seconds from the occurrence of a starting prize to the completion of the display of the pending display based on the starting winning. It takes. Then, the hold display after the end of the specific display display start effect B transitions to a rotating animation display in the first hold memory display area 135SG005D as the above-mentioned specific display rotation display effect, similar to other hold displays and active displays. .

In addition, when the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the specific display display start effect B, if the variable display is not executed at the timing of the start winning and the first special figure pending memory does not exist. An animation in which character A moves to active display area 135SG005A is displayed. Then, when the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A, the active display is displayed based on the starting prize, as in Figures 40-20 (C-1) to 40-20 (C-4). An animation of attacking (acting) on the active display area 135SG005A is displayed. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In this feature section 135SG, the period from the occurrence of a starting prize to the end of the animation in which character A attacks the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display display start effect B is about 0.5 seconds, The period from the end to the end of the appearance animation of the active display is approximately 0.2 seconds. That is, when performing the specific display display start performance B targeting the active display, it takes 0.7 seconds from the occurrence of a starting prize to the completion of the display of the active display based on the starting winning. Then, the active display after the end of the specific display display start performance B shifts to a rotating animation display in the active display area 135SG005A as the above-described specific display rotation display performance.

40-21 and 40-22 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS163 of FIG. 40-21 as the winning flash effect execution process. In the winning flash performance execution process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the starting winning receiving command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS272), and displays the starting winning receiving command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B. It is determined whether there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display preview effect is being executed (step 135SGS273).

If there is an entry in which the display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS273; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the entry is based on a winning start at the first starting opening. It is determined whether or not (step 135SGS274). It should be noted that whether or not the entry is based on a starting prize in the first starting hole may be determined from the starting hole winning designation command stored in the entry.

When the entry is an entry based on a starting prize in the first starting opening (step 135SGS274; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the gaming state is the normal state or not (step 135SGS275). If the gaming state is the normal state (step 135SGS275; Y), it is further determined whether the value of the production control process flag is between 0 and 3, that is, whether the gaming state is a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state. It is determined whether or not (step 135SGS276). If the value of the production control process flag is one of 0 to 3 (step 135SGS276; Y), the fluctuation category of the entry (the entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2") is super. It is determined whether it is reach (step 135SGS277).

If the variable category of the entry is super reach (step 135SGS277; Y), it is determined whether the value of the production control process flag is 2, that is, whether variable display is being executed (step 135SGS278). When the value of the performance control process flag is 2 (step 135SGS278; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the ready-to-win performance is being executed (step 135SGS279). It should be noted that whether or not the ready-to-win effect is being executed may be determined based on the contents of the variable display process data.

If the value of the performance control process flag is not 2 (step 135SGS278; N) or if the reach performance is not being executed (step 135SGS279; N), the performance control CPU 120 executes the winning flash performance based on the variable display result.・Determine non-execution. Incidentally, the variable display result may be specified from the symbol designation command of the entry for which the winning flash effect flag is not set.

As shown in FIG. 40-24, if the variable display result is a loss, execution of the winning flash effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and non-execution of the winning flash effect is determined at a rate of 90%. Further, when the variable display result is a jackpot, execution of the flash effect upon winning is determined at a rate of 20%, and non-execution of the flash effect upon winning is determined at a rate of 80%.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, when the winning flash performance is executed from the start winning time, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is set higher than when the winning flash performance is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 40-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the winning flash effect (step 135SG279b). If it has been decided to execute the winning flash effect (Step 135SG279b; Y), the winning flash effect flag of the entry (the entry for which the winning flash effect flag is not set) is set as the target of the winning flash effect. is set to "1" indicating that it is a pending memory (step 135SG280), and the winning flash effect execution flag is turned on (step 135SG280a). The process table for the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period is selected, the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period is started, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 (steps 135SGS281 to 135SGS283), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

As shown in Figure 40-23, the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period is to turn the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning flash and the game effect lamp 9 into the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period for 1.5 seconds from the start of winning. (As shown in FIGS. 40-26(A) and 40-26(B), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are lit at high brightness C1. This is a performance that causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output a sound corresponding to the winning flash performance at a volume V1, and displays the effect image 135SG005E of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. In addition, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect in this feature section 135SG is the sound corresponding to the first winning flash effect that is output during the execution of the first winning flash effect, and the second winning flash effect that is output during the execution of the second winning flash effect. When the flash is produced, it is divided into corresponding sound and sound. Among these, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, a sound having a relatively short output period (for example, 1 second), such as an electronic sound or the voice sound of a specific character, may be output once. Further, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the later period, it is sufficient to repeatedly output a sound having a longer output period than the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the earlier period, such as dedicated BGM or SE (sound effect). In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 135SG, in addition to the above-mentioned sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, a plurality of effect sounds such as the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display, which will be described later, are generated in different ways using different channels. Simultaneous output from speakers 8L and 8R is possible depending on the volume.

In addition, if the entry is an entry based on winning the second starting opening (step 135SG274; N), and if the gaming state is not the normal state (step 135SG275; N), the performance control process flag is either 0 to 3. If not (Step 135SG276; N), if the variable category of the entry is not Super Reach (Step 135SG277; N), if the reach effect is being executed (Step 135SG279; Y), do not execute the flash effect when winning a prize. If it is determined (Step 135SG279b), the winning flash performance target flag of the entry is set to "0" indicating that it is not eligible for the winning flash performance (Step 135SG279c), and the winning flash performance execution process is executed. finish.

In addition, when the winning flash effect execution flag is on in step 135SGS271 (step 135SGS271; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process timer for the previous winning flash effect is in operation (step 135SGS271; Y). 135SGS284). If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period is operating (Step 135SGS284; Y), the value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period is -1 (Step 135SGS285), and the value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period is decreased by 1, and then the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period is activated. It is determined whether the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning has timed out (step 135SGS286). If the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period has not timed out (step 135SGS286; N), the performance control CPU 120 operates the performance device according to the process data of the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period which is being executed. control (step 135SGS287), and proceeds to step 135SGS292.

Further, when the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period has timed out (step 135SGS286; Y), it is determined whether the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the last period winning has timed out (step 135SGS288). If the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the last previous period has not timed out (step 135SGS288; N), the performance control CPU 120 switches the process data and starts the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the next previous period. Then, the production device is controlled in accordance with the process data of the process timer for the flash production at the time of winning in the next first period (step 135SGS289, step 135SGS290, step 135SGS291), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

Then, in step 135SGS292, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. is controlled to flash in a manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period. In addition, a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS293), and the winning flash effect execution process is ended. In addition, as a mode corresponding to the first-term winning flash performance, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be repeatedly emitted in white or red. In addition, the modes corresponding to the flash performance when winning are the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the flash when winning. It is sufficient to cause the lamp 135SG009F to emit light in the same color.

Further, in step 135SGS288, when the process timer for the last first-term winning flash effect times out (step 135SGS288; Y), the performance control CPU 120 ends the first-term winning flash effect (step 135SGS294). Then, the process table for the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half is selected, the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half is started, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 (steps 135SGS294 to 135SGS297), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

As shown in Figure 40-23, the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half is the period from the end of the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period to the start timing of the reach performance of the target variable display super reach, as shown in Figure 40-23. A silhouette image of the character A imitated by the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5 by blinking in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect and outputting a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1. This is an effect that displays 135SG005S. As a mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half, the lamp 135SG009F for flash at the time of winning may repeatedly emit light in white or red in the same way as the flash performance at the time of winning in the first half. In addition, since the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the second half is carried out at a lower brightness than the flash effect at the time winning a prize in the first half (see Figure 40-28), the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning a prize in the flash direction at the time of winning a prize in the latter half is as follows. The light will be emitted in a darker color than the flash effect during the previous period.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 40-27(A), the game effect lamp 9 (particularly the frame lamp 9b) has a luminance of C2, which is lower than the luminance C1 described above, during the period excluding the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period. The light turns on and off (flashing) repeatedly. In particular, the blinking cycle at brightness C2 is longer than the blinking cycle when executing the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, and during the blinking, as shown in FIGS. 40-27(B) to 40-27(D). Thus, the frame lamp 9b is configured to blink while changing the emitted light color in stages at a plurality of locations in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. Therefore, the game effect lamp 9 during a period other than the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the previous period gives a lower impression to the player than the game effect lamp 9 during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the previous period.

In addition, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period is not operating in step 135SGS284, that is, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period is in operation (step 135SGS284; N), the CPU 120 for controlling the effect The value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning is -1 (step 135SGS298), and it is determined whether the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the latter half of the win, which has been decremented by 1, has timed out (step 135SGS299). If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning has not timed out (step 135SGS299; N), the effect device is controlled according to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning which is being executed (step 135SGS300). ), proceed to step 135 SGS307.

Then, when the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the later period has timed out (step 135SGS299; Y), it is determined whether the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the last winning event in the latter period has timed out (step 135SGS301). If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the last late prize winning has not timed out (step 135SGS301; N), the process data is switched, the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the next late prize win is started, and the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the next late prize winning is started. The production device is controlled according to the content (steps 135SGS302 to 135SGS304), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

In addition, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the last late winning time has timed out (step 135 SGS301; Y), the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the first late winning time is started, and the effect device is controlled according to the contents of process data 1 ( Step 135SGS305, step 135SGS306) and step 135SGS307 are proceeded to.

In step 135SGS307, the performance control CPU 120 controls the winning flash lamp 135SG009F to blink in a manner corresponding to the late winning flash performance. In addition, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1 (step 135SGS308).

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 checks the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS309), and determines whether the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "1", that is, the variable display being executed. It is determined whether or not is a variable display subject to a flash effect when winning a prize (step 135SGS310). When the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "0" (step 135SGS310; N), the winning flash performance execution process is ended. If the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "1" (step 135SGS310; Y), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ready-to-win performance (step 135SGS311).

If it is the start timing of the reach effect (step 135SGS311; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, turns off the flash effect in progress at the time of winning (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), The flash effect execution process ends.

Moreover, when it is not the start timing of the ready-to-win effect (step 135SGS311; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a symbol confirmation command is received (step 135SGS311a). If the symbol confirmation command is received (Step 135SGS311a; Y), the flash effect at the time of winning is ended in the second half, the flag in which the flash effect is being executed at the time of winning is turned off (Step 135SGS312, Step 135SGS313), and the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. finish. If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 135SGS311a; N), the winning flash effect execution process is ended without executing the processes of step 135SGS312 and step 135SGS313.

As described above, the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period in this feature section 135SG is a performance that ends when a predetermined performance period (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed, while the flash performance at the time of winning in the second period is a performance. This is a performance that is repeatedly executed without ending every time a certain period of time elapses until the start timing of the reach performance of the variable display of the target.

In addition, if the performance control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win performance of the variable display of the performance target during the execution of the flash performance at the time of late winning, due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the start timing of the ready-to-win performance will be determined. At the end timing of the variable display (timing of receiving the symbol confirmation command), which is a later timing, it is possible to finish the flash effect at the time of winning a second time including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning anew.

In addition, as shown in step 135SGS281 in FIG. 40-21 and step 135SGS295 in FIG. , and select the production process table 1 as the process table for flash production at the time of winning in the second half. In other words, the performance pattern (performance period) for the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period and the flash performance at the time of winning in the second period of this feature section 135SG is always the same in the same performance mode and the same performance period when winning in the first period, regardless of the number of retained memories etc. A flash effect and a flash effect when winning a prize in the latter half are executed.

FIG. 40-25 is a flowchart showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process process. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts each value of the process timer, variable time timer, and variable control timer by 1 (step 135SGS351, step 135SGS352, step 135SGS353). Note that the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are timers that are set in the variable display start setting process.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356). If the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356; Y), the process data is switched (step 135SGS357). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table set in the variable display start setting process to the process timer (step 135SGS358). Further, the control state for the production device (production component) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. set next (step 135SGS359). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out (step 135SGS356; N), the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) The performance device (performance component) is controlled according to the following (step 135SGS360).

In particular, as the control content of steps 135SGS359 and 135SGS360, the production control CPU 120 outputs variable display compatible sound corresponding to the variable display being executed from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2 smaller than the volume V1 (step 135SGS361). Note that the variable display compatible sound in the feature section 135SG refers to BGM that corresponds to the background image displayed on the image display device 5, BGM that corresponds to the number of pseudo-sequential performances executed during variable display, and the like. In addition, when the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period is not executed (step 135SGS362; N), the flashing control is performed on the game effect lamp 9 in a manner according to the variable display being executed (step 135SGS363), while the flash at the time of winning in the previous period While the performance is being executed (step 135SGS362; Y), the game effect lamp 9 is not controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed (as shown in FIGS. 40-21 and 40-22, the game effect lamp 9 is The lamp 9 is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a preview performance execution process (step 135SG364). In the preview performance execution process, for example, at the time when the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting process, it is determined whether or not to execute the preview performance while the variable display is being executed, and in which performance pattern the preview performance is executed. It is only necessary to decide in advance whether or not the event will be announced, and to be able to execute the preview performance according to the result of the determination. In addition, when determining the performance pattern of the preview performance in the variable display start setting process described above, one performance pattern is determined from a plurality of performance patterns at different ratios depending on the variable display result, so that the preview performance is The rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled may vary depending on whether the performance pattern is executed.

The performance executed as a preview performance in the feature section 135SG is a dialogue preview performance in which characters' lines are displayed on the image display device 5, and the jackpot expectation level varies depending on the displayed lines.

Further, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365; Y), the production control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of the left-center right decorative symbol (displayed after 30 ms have elapsed from the previous display switching point of the decorative symbol). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written into a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 135SGS366). In this way, variable display control of decorative patterns is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 sends to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this way, the background image, character image, and decorative pattern in the variable display of decorative patterns are displayed on the image display device 5. Also, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 135SGS367).

Further, if the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 135SGS365; N) or after executing step 135SGS366, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 135SGS368). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation command has been received is set (step 135SGS369; Y), the value of the production control process flag is changed to special symbol hit waiting processing. (Step S173) is updated to a value corresponding to (Step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if a pattern confirmation command is received, the control will shift to stopping the variable display, so for example, a variation pattern designation command that indicates a long variation time due to noise between boards, etc. Even in such a case, when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol), the variable display of the decorative symbol can be ended.

Incidentally, process data during variable display of the decorative pattern is set in the process table used for variable display control of the decorative pattern. In other words, the sum of the process timer setting values of process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n times out in the process of step 135SGS356, there is no process data to be switched (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the effect control of the decorative pattern based on the process table is finish.

Next, the operation mode of each production device when the winning flash production is executed in the feature section 135SG will be explained based on FIGS. 40-28 to 40-68. First, FIG. 40-28 is a timing chart in the case where a starting winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning. In addition, FIG. 40-28 shows both the case where execution of the hold display notice effect is decided at the same time when the execution of the winning flash effect is decided based on the starting winning, and the case where it is decided not to execute the hold display notice effect. 2 is a corresponding timing chart. FIGS. 40-29 to 40-48 show the image display device 5 when a starting winning occurs during execution of the variable display, and based on the starting winning, it is decided to execute the pending display preview effect and the winning flash effect. It is a diagram showing the effect mode in the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. Figures 40-49 to 40-68 show that a starting winning occurs while the variable display is being executed, and based on the starting winning, it is decided to execute the winning flash effect, while it is decided not to execute the pending display preview effect. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect in the image display device 5 and the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of a prize win when it is carried out.

In addition, in the case shown in Figures 40-29 to 40-48, "When it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect," the display mode of the pending display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is display pattern β or This is a case where the display pattern γ is displayed (displayed as a blue or red circle), and as shown in Figures 40-49 to 40-68, "While the execution of the winning flash effect has been decided, the pending display notice "When it is decided not to perform the performance" refers to the case where the display mode of the pending display that is the object of the flash performance at the time of winning is displayed in the display pattern α (displayed in a white circle).

First, as shown in FIGS. 40-28 and 40-29 (A), while the variable display is being executed, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of decorative patterns, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the variable display. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. In addition, while the variable display is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (Fig. 40-27 (A) to Fig. 40-27 (Blinking in the manner shown in (D)) is controlled.

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the preview performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R are displaying the image of the preview performance. A sound corresponding to the performance pattern (for example, a sound corresponding to a preview performance such as a sound of a character speaking the characters displayed on the image display device 5) is output at a volume V2. Further, as the pending memory, there are three first special figure pending memories (three pending displays are displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D).

If a prize is won in the first starting slot (starting prize) during such a variable display, and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the figure As shown in FIG. 40-28 and FIG. 40-29 (B), a flash effect is started at the time of first-term winning.

First, as shown in FIGS. 40-28 and 40-29 (B), the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume of V1 (V1>V2) for the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-28, 40-30(C), and 40-30(D), the display of the effect image 135SG005E starts from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG009X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the cycle T1. In the blinking control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the first period winning flash effect starts, as shown in Figure 40-30 (D), Figure 40-31 (E), and Figure 40-31 (F), as the above-mentioned specific display display start effect B. , An animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is controlled to blink, is displayed, and an animation in which the character A moves to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. After the character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed (if it is the main characteristic part 135SG, the fourth pending display is displayed). An animation that attacks (acts on) is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending storage display area 135SG005D, the pending display that is the target of the winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) that is currently being executed appears gradually from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A acted. An appearance animation is displayed (see Figures 40-20 (D-1) to 40-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display whose appearance animation has been completed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display as a specific display rotating display effect like other pending displays.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, if a starting winning occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning based on the starting winning, the display is performed before the display of the pending display based on the starting winning is completed. At this time, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. In addition, the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display display start effect B in the feature section 135SG is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period (Fig. 40-32 (G) and Fig. 40 -32(H)).

When the first period winning flash effect ends, the second period winning flash effect starts from the end timing. As for the flash performance at the time of winning in the latter half, as shown in Figures 40-28, 40-32 (G), and 40-32 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning from speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T2 (period T2>period T1). Furthermore, display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

In addition, at the end timing of the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period and the start timing of the flash performance at the time of winning in the second period, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emitting mode (blinking at brightness C1 and cycle T1) of the attacker lamp 9c and movable lamp 9d) corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period ends. The light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y corresponds to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. The display switches to the corresponding mode (blinking at brightness C2 and period T0 shown in FIGS. 40-27(A) to 40-27(D)). In other words, the lighting mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period. Returns to the lighting mode before the start of the flash performance when winning a prize in the previous period. Incidentally, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y remain off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter half.

In addition, as described above, the blinking of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) with the brightness C2 and the period T0, excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y, is as follows. The same mode as the mode before the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (the light emission mode shown in FIG. A gradation using blue-based colors, a gradation using red-based colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.) is executed.

The cycle T2, which is the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-mentioned cycle T1, but shorter than the above-mentioned cycle T0 (lamp blinking cycle length: T0>T2). >T1). Incidentally, during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the latter half, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 40-32 (H), 40-33 (I), and 40-33 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with a transparent black image 135SG005B overlappingly displayed over the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A. The silhouette image 135SG005S in the main characteristic portion 135SG is displayed in blue so that it can be easily recognized by the player when displayed overlappingly with the black image 135SG005B.

Note that in this feature section 135SG, an example is given in which the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in blue so that it is easily visible to the player when displayed overlappingly with the black image 135SG005B, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed in a color other than blue, such as green or red. In particular, when the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed in multiple colors such as the aforementioned blue, green, and red, the jackpot expectation level may be changed depending on which color the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. good. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the color of the silhouette image 135SG005S, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 40-32 (H) and 40-33 (J), in this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device A small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of 5. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed overlappingly, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. Regardless of whether or not the variable display is being executed, it is possible to confirm whether or not the variable display is being executed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M.

As shown in FIGS. 40-33 (J), 40-34 (K), and 40-34 (L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the image display device 5 The small symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination that indicates an error (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in this feature section 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is the symbol confirmation period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 40-33 (J), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R are When winning a prize, a sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at volume V2.

When the symbol confirmation period ends, a new variable display starts. At this time, in the image display device 5, the pending display displayed at the beginning in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D is moved to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display, and is also displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted to the right one by one. Furthermore, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is also started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 40-34 (K) to 40-41 (Z), in the variable display that precedes the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, the speaker 8L as the flash performance during the later winning time, The output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from 8R at the volume V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in Figures 40-38 (S) to 40-40 (X), in the variable display where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (Figure 40-40 (W) ) Refer to this characteristic section 135SG. In the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, a decorative pattern indicating a normal number is temporarily stopped, and a special pattern indicating a temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the decorative pattern display area 5C inside. ), as a flash effect at the time of winning in the latter half, output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, the brightness of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning and blinking at the cycle T2, and the image display device 5. The silhouette image 135SG005S of is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 40-41 (Y) and 40-41 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is off due to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the decorative patterns and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating an error (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in this feature section 135SG is also executed during the variable display symbol determination period when the normal reach is off. That is, as shown in FIGS. 40-41 (Y) and 40-41 (Z), even during the symbol determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at a volume of V2.

As shown in FIGS. 40-40 (W) and 40-40 (X), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are not activated. Light is emitted in a light emitting manner corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if it is the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern in the variable display, light is emitted in blue at brightness C2), and the background image is displayed based on the execution of the variable display again. Returns to the light emission mode according to the . Furthermore, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop, so the player can It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-42(a) and 40-42(b), when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started, the variable display that is the subject of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, and the The pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIG. 40-43(c) to FIG. 40-47(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is continued. Furthermore, during variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIGS. 40-43(d) and 40-44(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figure 40-45 (g) to Figure 40-46 (j)) reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 40-46 (j)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as a late winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at brightness C2 and period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 40-45(g) and 40-46(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are not connected to the decorative pattern. The light is emitted in a lighting mode corresponding to the temporary stop (for example, if it is the first temporary stop, it is blue at brightness C2, and if it is the second temporary stop, it is green at brightness C2), and the display is re-variable. Based on this, the light emission mode returns to the one corresponding to the background image. Although not shown in the feature section 135SG, when performing three pseudo-continuous effects during variable display, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacker The lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emitting manner (for example, red at brightness C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and emit light in accordance with the background image based on execution of variable display again. Return to aspect.

As shown in FIGS. 40-48(m) and 40-48(n), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F once whites out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white), then the ready-to-reach effect is started. In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F becomes white-out, thereby suggesting that a super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the whiteout timing, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect during the latter period, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

Also, at the whiteout timing, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y end blinking at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0. . The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d remain off during the whiteout period.

That is, during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d remain off. Then, from the timing when the whiteout ends, in accordance with the above-mentioned reach effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d respond to the reach effect. The light emission mode (lighting at brightness C1) starts.

Further, during the whiteout period, output of variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and there is no sound, and from the timing when the whiteout ends, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, At the same time that the attacker lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d begin to emit light (lighting at brightness C1) in accordance with the reach effect, the speakers 8L and 8R begin to output a sound corresponding to the reach effect, which is a sound that corresponds to the reach effect. . In addition, as the sound corresponding to the reach effect in this feature section 135SG, BGM, etc., which is different from the sound corresponding to the variable display, must be output so that the player can recognize that the reach effect (super reach effect) is in progress. Bye.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 40-28, if a starting prize occurs during the execution of the variable display, and it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect based on the starting winning, the corresponding starting door lamp lighting effect will be displayed. From the timing of the starting winning, the starting port lamp 135SG009S changes the color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, blue when the display pattern of the pending display is display pattern β, and the display pattern of the pending display is display pattern γ). start emitting light (in red).

The light emission of the starting port lamp 135SG009S is a performance that is executed completely independently of the above-mentioned winning flash performance, and regardless of the blinking mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F or the game effect lamp 9, the above-mentioned starting Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice performance is continued from the time of winning to the end of the target variable display of the starting opening lamp light emission performance (target variable display of the flash performance at the time of winning).

Next, a case will be described in which the execution of the pending display preview performance is not determined together with the flash performance at the time of winning in the starting winning while the variable display is being executed.

First, as shown in FIGS. 40-28 and 40-49 (A), while the variable display is being executed, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of decorative patterns, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the variable display. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. In addition, while the variable display is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (Fig. 40-27 (A) to Fig. 40-27 (Blinking in the manner shown in (D)) is controlled.

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, if it is during the execution period of the preview performance, the image display device 5 displays an image according to the performance pattern of the preview performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the image of the preview performance. A sound corresponding to the performance pattern (sound corresponding to the preview performance) is output at volume V2. Further, as the pending memory, there are three first special figure pending memories (three pending displays are displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D).

If a prize is won in the first starting slot (starting prize) during such a variable display, and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the figure As shown in FIG. 40-28 and FIG. 40-49 (B), a flash effect is started at the time of first-term winning.

First, as shown in FIGS. 40-28 and 40-49 (B), the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume of V1 (V1>V2) for the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-28, 40-50(C), and 40-50(D), the display of the effect image 135SG005E starts from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the cycle T1. In the blinking control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the first period winning flash effect is started, as shown in Figure 40-49 (B), Figure 40-50 (C), and Figure 40-50 (D), as the above-mentioned specific display display start effect A. , an appearance animation is displayed in which the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect (previous period winning flash effect), gradually appears from the bottom to the top (Figure 40-19 (B-1) to Figure 40-19 (See (B-4)). Note that the pending display whose appearance animation has been completed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display as a specific display rotating display effect like other pending displays.

In particular, when the specific display display start effect A is executed together with the winning flash effect, the appearance animation of the pending display ends when the effect image 135SG005E is still being displayed on the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the above-described specific display display start effect B is executed together with the winning flash effect, the appearance animation of the pending display ends after the display of the effect image 135SG005E ends on the image display device 5 (Fig. 40-29~ (See Figure 40-32). In other words, when specific display display start effect A is executed, the display of the pending display (appearance animation) is completed at an earlier timing than when specific display display start effect B is executed, and the transition to rotation animation is started. There is.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, if a starting winning occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the display is performed before the display of the pending display based on the starting winning is completed. At this time, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. Incidentally, the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display display start effect A in the present feature section 135SG is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period.

When the first-term winning flash performance ends, the second-term winning flash performance starts from the ending timing. As for the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half, as shown in Figure 40-28, Figure 40-52 (G) and Figure 40-52 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning from speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T2 (period T2>period T1). Further, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

In addition, at the end timing of the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period and the start timing of the flash performance at the time of winning in the second period, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emitting mode (blinking at brightness C1 and cycle T1) of the attacker lamp 9c and movable lamp 9d) corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period ends. The light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y corresponds to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. The display switches to the corresponding mode (blinking at brightness C2 and period T0 shown in FIGS. 40-27(A) to 40-27(D)). In other words, the lighting mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period. Returns to the lighting mode before the start of the flash effect when winning a prize in the previous period. Incidentally, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y remain off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter half.

In addition, as described above, the blinking of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) with the brightness C2 and the period T0, excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y, is as follows. The same mode as the mode before the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (the light emission mode shown in FIG. A gradation using blue-based colors, a gradation using red-based colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.) is executed.

The cycle T2, which is the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-mentioned cycle T1, but shorter than the above-mentioned cycle T0 (lamp blinking cycle length: T0>T2). >T1). Incidentally, during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the latter half, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 40-52 (H), 40-53 (I), and 40-53 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with a transparent black image 135SG005B overlappingly displayed over the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 40-52 (H) and 40-53 (J), in this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device A small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of 5. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed overlappingly, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. Regardless of whether or not the variable display is being executed, it is possible to confirm whether or not the variable display is being executed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M.

As shown in FIGS. 40-53 (J), 40-54 (K), and 40-54 (L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the image display device 5 The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in this feature section 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is the symbol confirmation period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 40-53 (J), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R are When winning a prize, a sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at volume V2.

When the symbol confirmation period ends, a new variable display starts. At this time, in the image display device 5, the pending display displayed at the beginning in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D is moved to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display, and is also displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted to the right one by one. Furthermore, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is also started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 40-54 (K) to 40-61 (Z), in the variable display that precedes the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, the speaker 8L, which is the flash performance when winning the second half, The output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from 8R at the volume V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in Figures 40-58 (S) to 40-60 (X), in the variable display in which pseudo-continuous effects are executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (Figure 40-60 (W) ) Refer to this feature section 135SG. In the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, a decorative pattern indicating a normal number is temporarily stopped, and a special pattern indicating a temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the decorative pattern display area 5C inside. In the latter half of the winning flash performance, the sound corresponding to the winning flash performance is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume of V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and the image display device 5 Display of silhouette image 135SG005S is executed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 40-61 (Y) and 40-51 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is off due to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the decorative patterns and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in the present feature section 135SG is also executed during the symbol determination period of the variable display when the normal reach is off. That is, as shown in FIGS. 40-61 (Y) and 40-61 (Z), even during the symbol determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at a volume of V2.

As shown in FIGS. 40-60 (W) and 40-60 (X), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are not activated. Light is emitted in a light emitting manner corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if it is the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern in the variable display, light is emitted in blue at brightness C2), and the background image is displayed based on the execution of the variable display again. Returns to the light emission mode according to the . Furthermore, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop, so the player can It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-62(a) and 40-62(b), when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started, the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started, and the The pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIG. 40-63(c) to FIG. 40-67(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is continued. Further, during variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIGS. 40-63(d) and 40-64(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figure 40-65 (g) to Figure 40-66 (j) reference).

As shown in FIGS. 40-65(g) and 40-66(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are not connected to the decorative pattern. The light is emitted in a lighting mode corresponding to the temporary stop (for example, if it is the first temporary stop, it is blue at brightness C2, and if it is the second temporary stop, it is green at brightness C2), and the display is re-variable. Based on this, the light emission mode returns to the one corresponding to the background image. Although not shown in the feature section 135SG, when performing three pseudo-continuous effects during variable display, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacker The lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emitting manner (for example, red at brightness C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and emit light in accordance with the background image based on execution of variable display again. Return to aspect.

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 40-66 (j)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as a late winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is outputted at the volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 40-68(m) and 40-68(n), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F once whites out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white), then the ready-to-reach effect is started. In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F becomes white-out, thereby suggesting that a super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the whiteout timing, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect during the latter period, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

Also, at the whiteout timing, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y stop blinking at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0. . These main lamps 9a, frame lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, and movable lamps 9d remain off during the whiteout period, but after the whiteout ends, they emit light in a manner that corresponds to the reach effect. .

Further, during the whiteout period, output of variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and there is no sound, and from the timing when the whiteout ends, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, At the same time that the attacker lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d begin to emit light (lighting at brightness C1) in accordance with the reach effect, the speakers 8L and 8R begin to output a sound corresponding to the reach effect, which is a sound that corresponds to the reach effect. . In addition, as the sound corresponding to the reach effect in this feature section 135SG, BGM, etc., which is different from the sound corresponding to the variable display, must be output so that the player can recognize that the reach effect (super reach effect) is in progress. Bye.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 135SG, FIG. 40-28, FIG. 40-29(A) to FIG. 40-32(H), FIG. As shown in D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light before the display of the pending display is completed, making it easier for the player to recognize the pending display that is the subject of the winning flash effect. . Furthermore, it has a winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a first light emitting means in the present invention, and a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d as second light emitting means in the present invention. As shown in 40-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at a brightness of C1 and a cycle of T1 during the execution period of the first-term winning flash effect, and at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T1 during the second-term winning flash effect. While blinking at T2, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d blink at brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first half, and at the time of winning in the second half. During the execution period of the flash effect, it flashes at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0, so during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, not only the winning flash lamp 135SG009F but also the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacker lamp 9c By blinking the movable lamp 9d at a brightness of C1 and a period of T1, it is possible to make the winning flash effect more prominent, so that the game can more easily recognize the pending display that is the subject of the winning flash effect. It has become.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, when a new starting winning occurs during the variable display, the holding memory based on the starting winning is subject to the execution or non-execution of the winning flash effect and the execution of the holding display preview effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, if a new starting winning occurs when the variable display is not being executed and there is no pending memory, the starting winning winning will be determined. It may be possible to determine whether or not to execute a flash effect at the time of winning and whether to execute a pending display notice effect based on the pending memory based on the above. Specifically, when a new starting prize occurs during the variable display, display pattern α to display pattern γ (pending display notice) are displayed in the active display area 135SG005A as specific display display start effect A or specific display display start effect B. After executing the appearance animation of the active display of either display pattern (display pattern in the case of non-execution of the effect or display pattern in the case of execution of the suspended display preview effect), the appearance animation of the active display is performed as a specific display rotation display effect. In addition to executing the rotating display, it is sufficient to execute the winning flash performance (early winning flash performance and later winning flash performance) based on the start of the variable display based on the starting winning.

In addition, as shown in Figures 40-15, 40-30 (D) to 40-32 (H), and 40-49 (B) to 40-50 (D), the specific display display start effect is The part where the appearance animation in which the hold display gradually appears from the bottom to the top is displayed, and Figure 40-15, Figure 40-30 (D) to Figure 40-32 (H), Figure 40-49 (B) to Figure 40 As shown in -50(D), it consists of a pending display and a rotating animation, and as shown in Figures 40-19 and 40-20, from the timing when the pending display appearance animation is completed. , since the rotating animation of the hold display is started, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the hold display.

In addition, as shown in Figures 40-29 (A) to 40-32 (H), when performing specific display display start effect B, as a winning flash effect from a timing before the display start of the pending display. Since the flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light when winning a prize, it is possible to make the flash performance more prominent when winning a prize. Furthermore, in this feature section 135SG, even when executing the specific display display start effect A shown in FIGS. 40-49(A) to 40-50(D), the winning flash effect is started from the timing before the display start of the pending display. Since the flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light when winning a prize, it is possible to make the flash effect more prominent when winning a prize.

In addition, the execution period of specific display display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the execution period of specific display display start effect B is 1.2 seconds. As shown in FIG. 40-50(D), since the winning flash effect starts before the end timing of the specific display display start effect A, the display pattern of the pending display is any one of display patterns α to display patterns γ. Even if the winning flash performance is started before the specific display display start performance ends, the player can surely recognize the pending display that is the object of the winning flash performance.

In addition, as shown in Figure 40-28, Figure 40-29 (A), Figure 40-29 (B), Figure 40-49 (A), and Figure 40-49 (B), when winning a prize based on the starting prize. When it is decided to execute the flash effect, the player can start the flash effect by turning off the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d. Recognizable.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are turned off once. Although the present invention is not limited to this, when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame The lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d are set to emit light at a lower brightness than the previous brightness (for example, if the light was emitted at the brightness C2 up to then, the brightness C3 is lower than the brightness C2). It may be changed. In other words, the "low brightness state" in the present invention includes a state in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d are emitting light at low brightness, as well as a state in which they are turned off. It also includes a state in which the light is on (a state in which no light is emitted).

Also, as shown in Figures 40-29(A) to 40-48(n) and Figures 40-49(A) to 40-68(n), during variable display, a preview effect is being executed. The winning flash effect can be executed both when the variable display is in progress and when it is not in progress, and the speakers 8L and 8R execute the winning flash effect while the variable display is being executed, as shown in Figure 40-29 (B). When doing so, the sound corresponding to the variable display is output at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output at the volume V1 (V1>V2), and when the winning flash effect is executed while the preview effect is being executed, The sound corresponding to the preview performance is outputted at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is outputted at the volume V1 (V1>V2). Therefore, even if the speakers 8L and 8R are outputting the sound corresponding to the variable display and the sound corresponding to the preview effect, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning can be outputted so that the player can easily hear the flash effect at the time of winning. By outputting a corresponding sound, a player can easily recognize the execution of a flash performance when winning a prize.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is set to the volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R, so that the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at volume V2, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect when winning a prize is output as the sound corresponding to the preview effect. As a form of outputting with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display and the winning flash effect, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at a lower volume than the volume V2. (For example, it may be output at volume V3).

Further, in this feature section 135SG, a mode has been exemplified in which the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the preview effect or the sound corresponding to the variable display body, but the present invention is not limited to this. When winning a prize, it is not necessary to output the sound corresponding to the flash effect with priority over the sound corresponding to the preview effect or the sound corresponding to the variable display. Specifically, if the preview effect is started while the winning flash effect is being executed (while outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect or the sound corresponding to the strange display from speakers 8L and 8R), the winning effect from speakers 8L and 8R will start. It is also possible to temporarily stop the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect and output only the sound corresponding to the variable display and the sound corresponding to the preview effect, or only one of the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game interest due to the player having difficulty in hearing the sound corresponding to the preview effect or the sound corresponding to the variable display due to the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect.

In addition, as shown in Figures 40-28, 40-29 (A) to 40-32 (H), and 40-49 (A) to 40-50 (D), when winning a prize according to the starting prize. When it is decided to execute the flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, and then the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking and the pending display appearance animation is completed. Therefore, by outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, it is possible to quickly make the player aware that a starting winning has occurred and that the execution of the winning flash effect has been decided, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. can.

In addition, this feature section 135SG exemplifies a form in which after the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started, and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is started from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the appearance animation of the pending display are started. You can do it like this.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 40-28, during the execution period of the first period winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C1, and during the second period of the second period winning flash effect, the winning moment flash By flashing the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at a brightness of C2 (C1>C2), at least the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be made to flash at a brightness of C1 to make the player aware of the start of the winning flash effect. It is possible to prevent the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from blinking at the brightness C1 even during the execution period of the later winning flash performance, which obstructs other performances and reduces game interest.

In this feature section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 40-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at a brightness C1 and cycle T2 as the first period winning flash effect, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked as the second period winning flash effect. As an example of a "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis", a mode is shown in which the light is blinked at a luminance C2 lower than the luminance C1 and at a cycle T2 that is longer than the cycle T1. In other words, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the late winning flash performance of the feature section 135SG is a low-speed blinking mode where the degree of emphasis is low due to the slow blinking speed (long blinking cycle). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and includes both a low brightness mode in which the degree of emphasis is low due to low brightness, and the present invention is not limited to this. The "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the lamp 135SG009F may be only one of the low-speed blinking mode and the low-intensity mode.

In addition, as shown in Figure 40-28, the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the second half is the period in which the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, and the period in which the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. Since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2 before and after the start of the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect, It becomes easier for the player to recognize that the display is variable, and the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 40-28, during the execution period of the first-term winning flash effect, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and during the execution period of the second-term winning flash effect, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S, the effect image 135SG005E can be displayed on the image display device 5 to make the player aware of the start of the winning flash effect during the execution period of the winning flash effect in the previous period, During the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the second half, by displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 continues to display the effect image 135SG005E, which obstructs other displays and reduces the enjoyment of the game. can be suppressed from decreasing.

In particular, in the main characteristic portion 135SG, the effect image 135SG005E is brighter than the silhouette image 135SG005S, as shown in FIGS. Since it is displayed in color and the display area on the image display device 5 is wide, the display of the effect image 135SG005E allows the player to effectively recognize the start of the winning flash effect.

In addition, as shown in Figure 40-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. Now, a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8l and 8R at a volume of V2 (V1>V2). In this way, by outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect at the volume V1 as the winning flash effect, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize that the winning flash effect has started. At the same time, during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the later period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at the volume V2, thereby preventing a decrease in gaming interest due to other effects being obstructed by the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning. It can be suppressed.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, while the flash effect at the time of winning a prize is being executed in the latter half, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is outputted at the volume V2, so that other effects are obstructed by the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning. Although the present invention is exemplified as a form of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest, the present invention is not limited to this, and by not outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect while the later winning flash effect is being executed, other effects may be suppressed when winning a prize. It may also be possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to interference by the sound corresponding to the flash effect.

In addition, as shown in Figures 40-29(A) to 40-48(n), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter half, the display before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize starts. During the symbol confirmation period of the variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink, that is, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the symbol confirmation command has been received (the confirmation command reception flag has been set) or not. Regardless of whether the display time timer has timed out or not, by continuing to flash the winning flash lamp 135SG009F during the symbol confirmation period, the player will be controlled into a jackpot gaming state. The feeling of anticipation can be maintained accurately until the start of the variable display which is the object of the flash effect when winning a prize, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, as a flash performance at the time of winning in the first period, the lamp for the winning flash 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are set in a mode (brightness) according to the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period. C1 and period T1), and after the end of the first period winning flash performance, as the second period winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is set in a mode (brightness C2 and period T2) according to the second period winning flash performance. ), while the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are emitted in a manner corresponding to the background image (brightness C2 and period T0), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance control CPU 120 clears the process timer for the first-term winning flash performance at the timing when the first-term winning flash performance ends, so that the performance control CPU 120 clears the process timer for the first-term winning flash performance during the execution period of the second-term winning flash performance. It may be possible to prevent the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d from emitting light in a manner corresponding to the previous winning flash effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-3, a small pattern 135SG005M is arranged at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 40-33 (J), the pattern is confirmed. During the period, the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed with variable display stopped, so even if the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to emit light during the pattern confirmation period, the small pattern 135SG005M will be derived in combination to indicate a win. Since it is displayed, the player can be made aware that the symbol confirmation period is in progress.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 40-33 (J), while the winning flash effect is being executed, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small Since the symbol 135SG005M is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed overlappingly with the small symbol 135SG005M, making it difficult for the player to recognize the end of the variable display. You can prevent it from getting stuck.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, it is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect that includes temporary stopping and variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 during variable display, and variable display during execution of the winning flash effect. When a pseudo continuous effect is executed in , when the decorative pattern temporarily stops, a special symbol stops in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C (see Figure 40-40, etc.) Silhouette as a flash effect at the time of winning Since the images 135SG005S can be displayed overlappingly, the special symbol is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S, giving the player a sense of surprise and increasing his enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 40-28 and 40-42(a) to 40-47(l), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display that is subject to the flash effect when winning a prize. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, and the interest of the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 40-28, during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at a brightness of C2 and a period of T2 before the start of the ready-to-win effect. While the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off at the start timing, as shown in FIG. 40-22, due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the performance control CPU 120 determines that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win performance of the variable display of the performance target. If this is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (timing at which the symbol confirmation command is received), which is a timing later than the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect, a second-term winning flash effect including blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is performed again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect does not end at the timing of the start of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 40-22, if the performance control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the ready-to-reach performance of the variable display of the performance target due to the generation of static electricity, the performance control CPU 120 Since the late winning flash performance is ended based on receiving the command, it is possible to further reduce the sense of discomfort when ending the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash performance.

In addition, as shown in Figure 40-21, if a winning start occurs at the first start opening while the Super Reach reach effect is being executed, execution of the winning flash effect is not determined, so the Super Reach reach effect is not determined. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 40-17, in this feature section 135SG, the pending display and active display can be displayed in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ with different jackpot expectations. As shown, when it is decided to display the pending display or active display in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the starting port lamp 135SG009S flashes the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect or the game effect. Regardless of the lighting mode of the lamp 9, etc., the light is emitted in a color according to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of a starting winning to the end of the variable display based on the starting winning, so the player can see the pending display or the active display. Since the display mode can also be recognized by the light emission mode (emission color) of the starting port lamp 135SG009S, the game enjoyment can be improved.

Although the characteristic parts of the present invention have been explained above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic parts, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It will be done.

For example, although the flash effect at the time of late winning in the feature section 135SG is executed regardless of whether or not it is during the symbol confirmation period (while the variable display is stopped), the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in Figures 40-69 to 40-89 as a modified example 135SG-1, output of a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect as a winning flash effect in the later period, light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and silhouette. The display of the image 135SG005S, etc. may not be executed during the symbol confirmation period.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 40-69 and 40-70(A), while the variable display is being executed, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of decorative patterns, and the speakers 8L and 8R , the variable display compatible sound is output at volume V2. In addition, while the variable display is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (Fig. 40-27 (A) to Fig. 40-27 (Blinking in the manner shown in (D)) is controlled.

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, if it is during the execution period of the preview performance, the image display device 5 displays an image according to the performance pattern of the preview performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the image of the preview performance. A sound corresponding to the performance pattern (sound corresponding to the preview performance) is output at volume V2. Further, as the pending memory, there are three first special figure pending memories (three pending displays are displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D).

If a prize is won in the first starting slot (starting prize) during such a variable display, and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the figure As shown in FIG. 40-69 and FIG. 40-70(B), a flash effect is started at the time of winning in the first period.

First, as shown in Figures 40-69 and 40-70 (B), the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume of V1 (V1>V2) for the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-69, 40-71 (C), and 40-71 (D), the display of the effect image 135SG005E starts from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control is started at the cycle T1 of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y. In the blinking control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the first period winning flash effect is started, as shown in Figure 40-71 (D), Figure 40-72 (E), and Figure 40-72 (F), as the above-mentioned specific display display start effect B. , An animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is controlled to blink, is displayed, and an animation in which the character A moves to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. After the character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed (the fourth position in the case of this modification 135SG-1). An animation of attacking (acting on) the position where the pending display is displayed is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display that is the target of the winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) that is currently being executed appears gradually from the bottom to the top at the position where the action took place. An appearance animation is displayed (see Figures 40-20 (D-1) to 40-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display whose appearance animation has been completed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display as a specific display rotating display effect like other pending displays.

In other words, in this modification example 135SG-1, if a starting winning occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, then the display of the pending display based on the starting winning is completed. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. In addition, the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display display start effect B in this modified example 135SG-1 is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the second period (Fig. 40-73 (G) and (See Figure 40-73(H)).

When the first-term winning flash performance ends, the second-term winning flash performance starts from the ending timing. As for the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half, as shown in Figure 40-69, Figure 40-73 (G) and Figure 40-73 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning from speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and period T2 (period T2>period T1), and the brightness C2 and the period T2 of the gaming effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y. Blinking (blinking in the manner shown in FIGS. 40-27(A) to 40-27(D)), at regular intervals of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. starts to be displayed.

Incidentally, the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 is performed in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image) A gradation using blue-based colors, a gradation using red-based colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.) are performed.

The cycle T2, which is the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-mentioned cycle T1, but shorter than the above-mentioned cycle T0 (lamp blinking cycle length: T0>T2). >T1). Incidentally, during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the latter half, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 40-74(I) and 40-74(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the transparent black image 135SG005B overlappingly displayed over the entire area of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIG. 40-74 (J), FIG. 40-75 (K), and FIG. 40-75 (L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the image display device 5 The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating an error (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. As shown in Figures 40-69, 40-76 (M), and 40-76 (N), during the symbol confirmation period from the end timing of the variable display to the start timing of the next variable display, the late The output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the winning flash effect and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are stopped, and the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable. The body lamp 9d continues to blink only in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5.

When the symbol confirmation period ends, a new variable display starts. At this time, in the image display device 5, the pending display displayed at the beginning in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D is moved to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display, and is also displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted to the right one by one. Furthermore, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is also started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 40-75 (K) to 40-82 (Z), in the variable display that precedes the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash performance, the speaker 8L as the flash performance during the later winning time, While the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from 8R at the volume V2, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed, During the symbol confirmation period, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect during the latter period, the brightness of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at C2 and the blinking period T2, and the image display. The silhouette image 135SG005S is never displayed on the device 5.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 40-79 (S) to 40-81 (X), in the variable display where the pseudo continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 40-81 ( See W). In this modified example 135SG-1, a decorative pattern indicating normal numbers is temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a special pattern that notifies the temporary stop is placed in the inner decorative pattern display area 5C. (temporarily stops), as the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter half, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, the brightness of the lamp 135SG009F for the winning flash at the time of winning, blinking at the brightness C2 and period T2, and the image display. Display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the device 5 is executed.

In addition, in Figure 40-81 (W), during the execution of the winning flash effect, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash effect is The brightness C2 and cycle T2 of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F are not executed, but depending on the timing of the temporary stop, the brightness C2 and cycle T2 of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may vary depending on the timing of the temporary stop. Flashing is now performed. That is, in this modification 135SG-1, for the variable display that precedes the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, the winning flash performance is continuously executed during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 40-82 (Y) and 40-82 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is off due to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the decorative patterns and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in the present feature section 135SG is also executed during the symbol determination period of the variable display when the normal reach is off. That is, as shown in FIGS. 40-82 (Y) and 40-82 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly on the image display device 5 even during the symbol confirmation period. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at a volume of V2.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 40-81 (W) and FIG. 40-81 (X), during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop. Therefore, the player can recognize that the variable display has not ended yet by visually recognizing the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-83(a) and 40-83(b), when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started, the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started, and the The pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIG. 40-84(c) to FIG. 40-88(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is continued. Further, during variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIGS. 40-84(d) and 40-85(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figure 40-86 (g) to Figure 40-87 (j) reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 40-87 (j)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as a late winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is outputted at the volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-89(m) and 40-89(n), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F once whites out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white), then the ready-to-reach effect is started. In addition, in this modification 135SG-1, the first display area 135SG005F becomes white-out, which suggests that the super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the whiteout timing, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect during the latter period, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends. On the other hand, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, and the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 except the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the period T0 are continued.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 40-69, if a starting prize occurs during the execution of the variable display, and it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect based on the starting winning, the corresponding starting door lamp lighting effect will be displayed. From the timing of the starting winning, the starting port lamp 135SG009S changes color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, blue if the display pattern of the pending display is display pattern β, and the display pattern of the pending display is display pattern γ). (in red), the light starts emitting light.

The light emission of the starting port lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the winning flash effect described above, and regardless of the blinking mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F or the game effect lamp 9, the above-mentioned starting Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice performance is continued from the time of winning to the end of the target variable display of the start lamp light emission performance (target variable display of the flash performance at the time of winning).

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-1, when the winning flash effect is started based on the starting winning, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is stopped as a late winning flash effect during the symbol confirmation period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that the variable display is in progress due to the winning flash lamp 135SG009F being lit continuously during the pattern confirmation period as a flash effect at the time of winning in the later period. ing. Furthermore, during the period of temporary suspension of the decorative symbols in the variable display that are the target of the winning flash performance, and during the temporary suspension period of the decorative symbols of the variable display that are the subject of the winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is activated. By continuing to blink at the brightness C2 and the period T2, it is possible to prevent the game from mistakenly assuming that the variable display has ended even though the decorative symbols are in the temporary stop period.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-1, during the pattern confirmation period during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash effect at the time of winning the winning flash 135SG009F, and the silhouette. Although a mode in which the display of image 135SG005S is stopped is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is possible to prevent the erroneous recognition that this is the case, output the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, turn on the winning flash lamp 135SG009F for the later winning flash effect, or display the silhouette image 135SG005S. Alternatively, only two may be executed.

Furthermore, in this modification 135SG-1, during the pattern confirmation period during the execution period of the late winning flash performance, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash performance as the late winning flash performance, the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the silhouette. Although the embodiment in which the display of the image 135SG005S is not executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, but the winning flash as a late winning flash effect during the symbol confirmation period during the execution period of the late winning flash effect. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may receive a symbol confirmation command during execution of the flash performance when winning a prize in the second half. Based on this, by clearing the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the second half, during the pattern confirmation period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning a prize is output as the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the second period, the light emission of the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning a prize, The silhouette image 135SG005S may not be displayed.

In this case, based on the reception of the first variable display start command, the performance control CP 120 selects the flash performance process table for later prize winnings and resets and starts the process timer for the flash performance for late prize winnings. By doing this, it is only necessary to start the flash effect at the time of winning (the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S) in response to the start of the new variable display.

In addition, as a mode in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F does not emit light as the late winning flash performance during the symbol confirmation period during the execution period of the latter winning flash performance, for example, the performance control CPU 120 may Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command during execution of the performance, the lamp control board 14 is sent to the lamp control board 14 for the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, instead of the lighting control data according to the process data of the process timer for the flash performance at the time of late winning. Lighting control data that maintains the lights off (for example, "0:0:0" indicating lights off as the RGB value of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F) may be output continuously until the variable display start command is received. .

In addition, if you do not execute the flash effect at the time of winning during the symbol confirmation period in this way, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning will be output again from the start timing of the new variable display, the lighting of the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning time at the time of winning, the silhouette image The display of 135SG005S may be re-executed from the beginning of each cycle (see Figure 40-69), or from the start timing of the new variable display, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect may be output, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be turned on, The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be restarted from the middle of each cycle.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-1, if the variable display ends during the execution of the flash performance at the time of late winning, during the symbol determination period of the variable display, the flash performance from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash performance at the time of late winning While stopping the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect when winning a prize and the display of the silhouette image 235SG005S, it also stops the output of the flash effect compatible sound and the display of the silhouette image 235SG005S. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d will continue to flash in this manner, but the present invention is not limited to this. Blinking may also be stopped. In particular, as a form of stopping the blinking of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d during the symbol confirmation period, the in-lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are stopped during the pattern confirmation period. The body lamp 9d may be turned off, or the in-lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d may be set to a certain color (for example, the background displayed on the image display device 5) during the pattern determination period. It may also be maintained in a state where it is continuously lit (color corresponding to the image).

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, in the explanation of FIG. If you set up a reach effect, make the jackpot expectation different between the reach effects of multiple super reach (for example, as a reach effect of super reach, the reach effect of super reach α and the reach effect of super reach α are different) It is also possible to provide a reach effect with a high super reach β.

In particular, when it is possible to execute reach effects of multiple super reaches with different jackpot expectations, as shown in FIGS. 40-90(A) and 40-90(B) as modification 135SG-2. , the movable body 32 can be moved between a retracted position (for example, a position above the image display device 5) and a presentation position (for example, a central front position when viewed from the front of the image display device 5), and a flash presentation when winning a prize. If the target variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach α (a variable display that executes a reach effect of super reach α), the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 during the variable display is By repeatedly moving the movable body 32 between the retracted position and the retracted position (for example, the intermediate position between the retracted position and the production position described above) during the period in which the first display area 135SG005F except for the first display area 135SG005F is once white-out, the movable body 32 Execute a moving body motion suggestion performance that suggests moving to the performance position, and when winning a prize, the variable display that is the target of the flash performance will be a variable display with a variation pattern of Super Reach β (Execute the reach performance of Super Reach β) (variable display), the movable body 32 is further evacuated after the above-described movable body motion suggestion effect is executed during a period in which the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is once whited out. A movable body motion performance may be performed in which the moving body is moved from a position to a performance position.

By doing this, during the whiteout period, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the movement of the movable body 32, and when the movable body 32 moves to the performance position (when the movable body movement performance is executed) Since the player can be informed that the movable body motion performance will execute the reach performance of super reach β, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the reach performance of super reach α, the game enjoyment can be improved.

For example, if the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach α, as shown in Figures 40-91 (A) and 40-91 (B), When the variable display starts, output of sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R starts. In addition, in the variable display, a flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter half is continued. Further, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIG. 40-91(B), FIG. 40-92(C), and FIG. 40-92(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figure 40-93 (E) to Figure 40-94 (H) reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 40-94 (H)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as a later winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at brightness C2 and period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-95 (I) to 40-96 (L), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F temporarily whites out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white). In addition, in this modification 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F becomes white-out, which suggests that the super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIG. 40-90(A) and FIG. 40-96(K) to FIG. 40-97(N), during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F The lighting at the brightness C2 and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are completed. Then, as a movable body motion suggestion performance, a movable body motion suggestion performance is performed based on the movable body 32 repeatedly reciprocating between the retreat position and the suggested position a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modified example 135SG-2) by a drive mechanism (not shown). When the pandemic ends, the whiteout period also ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion performance, the output of the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. Note that the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect may be a sound effect that allows the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retreat position and the suggested position (for example, a sound effect such as "rattle"). ) etc. can be output.

As shown in FIG. 40-90(A), FIG. 40-98(O), and FIG. 40-98(P), from the timing when the movable body motion suggestion presentation and whiteout are completed, the image display device 5 At the same time as the reach effect of Reach α starts, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, and winning flash lamp 135SG009F start lighting with brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the reach effect. Then, the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the ready-to-reach effect sound (such as BGM different from the variable display compatible sound) corresponding to the ready-to-reach effect of the super reach α.

In addition, if the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach β, the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a variable display as shown in Figure 40-99 (A) and Figure 40-99 (B). When the variable display starts, output of sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R starts. In addition, in the variable display, a flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter half is continued. Further, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIG. 40-99(B), FIG. 40-100(C), and FIG. 40-100(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figure 40-101 (E) to Figure 40-102 (H) reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 40-102 (H)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as a later winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is outputted at the volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-103 (I) to 40-104 (L), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F temporarily becomes white-out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white). In addition, in this modification 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F becomes white-out, which suggests that the super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIG. 40-90(B) and FIG. 40-104(K) to FIG. 40-105(N), during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F The lighting at the brightness C2 and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are completed. Then, as a movable body motion suggestion production, the movable body motion is suggested based on the movable body 32 repeatedly reciprocating between the retreat position and the suggested position a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modification 135SG-2) by a drive mechanism (not shown). The performance ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion performance, the output of the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. Note that the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect may be a sound effect that allows the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retreat position and the suggested position (for example, a sound effect such as "rattle"). ) etc. can be output.

After the movable body motion suggestion production ends, the whiteout period ends and the movable body motion production begins, as shown in Figures 40-90(B) and 40-106(O) to 40-106(P). As a result, the movable body 32 is moved from the retracted position to the presentation position by a drive mechanism (not shown). In addition, during the period of the movable body movement performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are set to brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the movable body movement performance. Light. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 40-90(B), the speakers 8L and 8R output sound corresponding to the moving body motion effect at the volume V1 (see FIG. 40-106(P)). Note that, as the sound corresponding to the movable body movement effect in the feature section 135SG, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "Zudoon") that allows the player to recognize that the movable body has moved may be output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40-107(Q), the movable body motion performance ends based on the movable body 32 returning from the performance position to the retracted position. As shown in FIG. 40-90(B), FIG. 40-107(Q), and FIG. 40-107(R), from the timing when the movable body motion effect and whiteout are completed, the image display device 5 displays super reach. At the same time as the reach effect of β starts, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F start to light up at a brightness C1 corresponding to the reach effect. , the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting sound corresponding to the reach effect corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach β. In addition, as for the reach effect sound corresponding to the reach effect of Super Reach β, the sound corresponding to the variable display and the reach effect of Super Reach α are available so that the player can recognize that the reach effect of Super Reach β is in progress. It is sufficient to output BGM or the like that is different from the reach performance compatible sound corresponding to the performance.

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-2, in the variable display of super reach, which is the target of the winning flash effect, before the start of the super reach reach effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is set to brightness C2 and cycle T2. From the start timing of the super reach effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F lights up at a brightness of C2. In other words, when the reach effect starts, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F lights up at a brightness of C2 and Instead of blinking at the period T2, the light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-reach effect (lighting up at a brightness of C2), so the game enjoyment of the ready-to-reach effect can be improved.

In particular, as shown in Figures 40-96(K) to 40-98(O) and Figures 40-104(K) to 40-106(O), the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (whiteout). At the same time, during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at brightness C2 from the start timing of the Super Reach reach effect. Since it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to a change in the light emission mode of the lamp 135SG009F, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if the variable display that is the target of the flash effect when winning a prize is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach β, the movable body movement suggestion effect will be executed during the whiteout period, and the movable body movement suggestion effect will be executed during the whiteout period. The winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off in response to the execution of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and then, in response to the execution of the movable body movement effect (movement of the movable body 32 to the effect position), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is set to the movable body movement effect. It lights up at brightness C1 in a corresponding manner. In other words, since the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit at a brightness of C1 after being turned off due to the execution of the movable object motion suggestion effect, it is important to note that these changes in the lighting mode may give the player a sense of discomfort. Since it can be prevented, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, in the feature section 135SG, a form in which a dialogue preview performance can be executed as a preview performance suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot during variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , as modification example 135SG-3, the preview performance includes, in addition to the speech preview performance, the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes step by step, and a jackpot is expected according to the final number of change stages. It may be possible to perform a step-up effect with different degrees, a group preview effect in which a plurality of characters cross the image display device 5, or the like.

In particular, when it is possible to perform a step-up effect as the modified example 135SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 40-108 (A), 40-109 (A) to 40-113 (L), when winning When executing a step-up effect during a variable display in which a flash effect is not being executed, the timing for displaying an image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 or the timing for changing the image in stages is determined for the winning flash. The effect of the step-up performance may be enhanced by temporarily lighting the lamp 135SG009F at a brightness of C2. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 40-108(B) and FIG. 40-114(A) to FIG. 40-118(F), the step-up effect is executed during the variable display where the winning flash effect is being executed. At this time, since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has already been flashed at the brightness C2 and the period T2, the timing for displaying the image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 and the image are changed step by step. The winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not turned on at the right timing. In other words, while the winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is already emitting light in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect, is turned on in response to the step-up effect. In some embodiments, the light may not be emitted.

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-3, when the step-up effect is started in the variable display during execution of the winning flash effect, that is, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has already been set to the brightness C2 as the winning flash effect. In addition, if a step-up effect that lights up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F while it is blinking at cycle T2 is started, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from starting at an inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the winning flash performance in a manner corresponding to the step-up performance.

Furthermore, in the feature section 135SG, the movable body 32 is not operated before the start of the super reach reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and before the start of the super reach reach effect, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, it is possible to execute a movable body motion performance in which the movable body 32 is moved from a retracted position (for example, a position above the image display device 5) to a performance position (for example, a center front position when viewed from the front of the image display device 5). By doing so, it may be possible to notify the player that the super reach effect will be executed.

In this way, if it is possible to execute the movable body motion performance before the reach performance of super reach, as shown in FIGS. 40-119(A) and 40-119(B) as modification 135SG-4, When the winning flash effect is executed for the variable display of the super reach, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect. The expectation level of a jackpot may be made to differ depending on which of the light emission modes is changed depending on the reach performance of the super reach.

For example, as shown in Figure 40-119(C), if the variable display result of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is a jackpot, at the start of the variable display, the movable body From the start timing of the movement performance, it was decided to change the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect, and the reach effect started at a rate of 30%. From the timing, it is decided to change the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach effect. If the variable display result of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is a loss, at the start of the variable display, from the movable body movement effect start timing, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F It has been decided to change the lighting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect, and at a rate of 70%, from the start timing of the reach effect, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. It is decided to change the light emission mode from a mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to a light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect.

In addition, if it is decided to change the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect or the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach effect, the said decision. The winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be controlled in accordance with the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer in accordance with the progress of the variable display.

As described above, in this modification example 135SG-4, depending on the timing of ending the light emitting mode according to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, it is possible to determine whether the flash is in progress during the execution period of the movable body movement effect or when the super In some cases, it may be during the execution period of the reach effect of Reach, so it is necessary to check whether the flash effect at the time of winning will end during the execution period of the moving body movement effect or during the execution period of the reach effect of Super Reach. It can be easily recognized by people. In particular, as shown in FIG. 40-119(C), the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the start timing of the movable body motion performance to the corresponding movable body motion performance. Since the expectation level of a jackpot is different depending on whether the flash mode is set according to the start timing of the reach effect or when the light emission mode is set according to the reach effect from the start timing of the reach effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the flash effect when winning a prize. This allows players to increase their interest in gaming.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-4, the timing at which the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends (changes to the light emission mode according to the movable body movement effect or the light emission mode according to the reach effect). Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game can be played according to the timing when the winning flash lamp 135SG009F ends blinking as the winning flash effect. It may also be possible to suggest the setting values set in the device 1. By doing so, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the end timing of the winning flash effect, and to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-4, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light either at the start of the movable body movement performance during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance or at the start of the super reach reach performance. The mode can be changed, and the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body motion performance from the start timing of the movable body motion performance. Since the expectation level of a jackpot differs depending on the start timing of the reach effect and the lighting mode corresponding to the reach effect, the player pays attention to the effect that is executed at the timing when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the present modification example 135SG-4, in the variable display of super reach, a form in which a movable body movement performance can be executed before the start of the reach performance of super reach is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, before the execution of the movable body motion performance, a movable body motion suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the movable body motion performance may be made possible. In this way, when it is possible to execute the movable body motion suggestion effect before executing the movable body motion effect, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to suggest the movable body motion. A case is provided in which the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion display, and the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode according to the winning flash display to the movable body motion suggestion display. The jackpot expectation level may be different depending on the case where the light emission mode is set according to the movable body motion suggestion performance from the start timing and the case where the light emission mode is set according to the ready-to-reach performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the performance that is being executed when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this modified example 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement suggestion effect from the start timing of the movable body movement suggestion effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The light emission (blinking) of the time flash lamp 135SG009F is set to end at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and at the start timing of the reach effect. The expectation level of the jackpot may be set to differ depending on whether the game ends at . In this way, even when providing multiple timings for stopping the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect during the variable display of 1, the effect control CPU 120 may cause the winning flash to occur due to the generation of static electricity, etc. If it is not possible to stop the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, at the end timing of the variable display (timing of receiving the symbol confirmation command), which is a timing later than these timings, the late prize winning including the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be resumed. All you have to do is end the flash effect.

By doing this, even if the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a winning flash performance cannot be stopped at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion performance or the start timing of the reach performance, the winning flash performance will continue. At the end timing of the target variable display, it is possible to end the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter half, including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning.

In addition, in the characteristic section 135SG, as display patterns of specific displays (pending display and active display), a display pattern α with the lowest jackpot expectation level is a white round shape, and a blue color with a jackpot expectation level higher than the display pattern α. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. As the display pattern, display patterns other than these display patterns α to γ may be provided.

For example, as shown in FIG. 40-120 as modified example 135SG-5, the display pattern of the specific display includes, in addition to the above-mentioned display patterns α to display patterns γ, any one of the pending display or the active display. Display pattern δ, which is a round shape with blinking white, that may change to display pattern β or display pattern γ at the timing of (low expectation of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ), as a pending display or active display The possibility of changing to display pattern β or display pattern γ at any timing during display is higher than display pattern δ (expectation level of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ: high) A certain character-shaped circle A display pattern ε may be provided.

In other words, among display patterns α to γ of the pending display and active display in Modified Example 135SG-5, display pattern γ (red display) has the highest jackpot expectation, display pattern α (white display) ) is set to have the lowest jackpot expectation. On the other hand, regarding the jackpot expectation of display pattern δ and display pattern ε when display pattern β and display pattern γ do not change, the jackpot expectation may be set lower than display pattern α, or lower than display pattern α. The jackpot expectation level may also be set to be higher than that of the display pattern β, and the jackpot expectation level may be set lower than that of the display pattern β.

Further, in the present modification example 135SG-5, the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, which may change to the display pattern β and the display pattern γ, are provided as the hold display and the active display display pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display pattern α is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the display pattern α changes to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a lower rate than the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε. Furthermore, there may be a case where the display pattern β is changed to the display pattern γ for the pending display or active display.

Furthermore, the feature section 135SG determines whether or not to execute a pending display preview effect (a display in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in display pattern β or display pattern β) and the display pattern when determining whether to execute a flash effect when winning a prize. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. You may decide.

For example, as shown in FIG. 40-120 as the above-mentioned modification 135SG-5, if it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning time, the display mode of the pending display or active display based on the starting winning is , the display pattern ε is determined at the highest rate, the display pattern δ is determined at a lower rate than the display pattern ε, the display pattern γ is determined at a lower rate than the display pattern δ, and the display pattern β is determined at a lower rate than the display pattern γ. It is sufficient to determine the display pattern α at a low ratio, and determine the display pattern α at the lowest ratio (determination ratio of the display pattern when deciding to execute the flash effect at the time of winning: display pattern ε > display pattern δ > display pattern γ > display pattern β > Display pattern α).

As mentioned above, display patterns α to display patterns ε are provided as display modes for specific displays (hold display and active display), and when a specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the specific display is displayed. Since there is a higher probability that the winning flash effect is executed at the same time than when pattern β or display pattern γ is displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to a specific display by executing the winning flash effect, and also to draw the player's attention to the specific display. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the display changes from the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the display pattern α is a display pattern in which a specific display is displayed in a white circle, the display pattern β is a display pattern in which a specific display is displayed in a blue circle, and the display pattern γ is a display pattern in which a specific display is displayed in a red circle. Since the display pattern δ is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a blinking white circle, the player can easily identify the difference in the specific display by the display color or blinking mode.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, when a specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is changed to display pattern β or display depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is executed. Although the rate at which the pattern changes to pattern γ is not described, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, a flash effect is displayed at the time of winning. The rate at which the display pattern of the specific display changes to display pattern β or display pattern γ may vary depending on whether or not the specific display is being executed. By doing this, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. can.

In Modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ that blinks in white is exemplified as a special aspect of the specific display in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display in the present invention is not limited to this. The special mode (display pattern δ) may be a color other than white, blue, or red (for example, purple or black), which are the normal mode or special mode of the specific display in the present invention.

Further, in the present modification example 135SG-5, an example is given in which the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ to suggest that the specific display changes to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. The invention is not limited to this, but it may be possible to perform an action effect that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ. .

In particular, in the case of an action presentation, multiple presentation modes (with different ratios of changing the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ) may be used as the presentation mode of the action presentation. For example, a first effect that can change a specific display displayed in display pattern δ to display pattern β or display pattern γ by acting on a specific display displayed in display pattern δ, and an effect that has a different presentation mode from the first effect and effect. A second effect effect is provided that can change the specific display to display pattern β or display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect effect by acting on the specific display displayed in display pattern δ. When the second effect is executed, the winning flash effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the first effect is executed.

By doing this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the effect is executed as the first effect or the second effect. It is possible to increase expectations for what will be carried out in the action presentation.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the flash effect is executed at a higher rate when winning a prize than when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ. Therefore, if a specific display is displayed in display pattern ε and a flash effect is executed at the time of winning, the player will be discouraged by the change in the display pattern of the specific display to display pattern β or display pattern γ. Since the player can draw attention to the player, the player's interest in playing the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the modification 135SG-5, a display pattern ε for displaying a character is provided as a display pattern for the specific display (suspended display and active display), and an action effect is executed for the character as the specific display. Although a form in which the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to display pattern β or display pattern γ is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible that the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on another character as a result of the effect.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 40-121 (A) and 40-121 (B), when the number of 1st special symbols reserved is 3 and is being displayed in a variable manner, a prize is entered in the 1st starting slot. (starting prize) occurs, and when the display pattern of the pending display based on the starting winning is determined to be the display pattern ε as a pending display preview effect based on the starting winning, the fourth block of the first pending storage display area 135SG005D An ally character is displayed as a pending display, and the active display displayed in the active display area 135SG005A changes to an enemy character (see FIG. 40-121 (B-1)).

In this state, the variable display ends and a new variable display starts, that is, as shown in FIGS. 40-122(A) and 40-122(B), When an ally character (suspended display of display pattern ε) moves from the display position of the fourth suspended display to the display position of the third suspended display, the ally character moves from the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. Act (shoot) against.

Then, each time the variable display ends and a new variable display starts, that is, as shown in FIG. 40-122(C) and FIG. 40-122(D), When the ally character displayed in the first hold memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the third hold display to the display position of the second hold display, the ally character displayed in the first hold memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the third hold display to the display position of the second hold display. When moving from the display position of the display to the display position of the first suspended display, the friendly character acts (shoots) at the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A.

Furthermore, when the variable display ends and the variable display that is the target of the pending display preview effect starts, the ally character displayed at the display position of the first pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed as active. The player moves to area 135SG005A, and the ally character acts directly on the enemy character within the active display area 135SG005A (a battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character is executed).

Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-123 (G) and 40-123 (H), if the ally character wins as a result of the battle performance, the ally character is displayed in display pattern β or in the active display area 135SG005A. The display changes to active display of display pattern γ. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 40-123 (I) and 40-123 (J), if the ally character is defeated as a result of the battle performance, the enemy character or ally character is displayed in the display pattern in the active display area 135SG005A. Changes to active display of α.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-6, when displaying a pending display in display pattern ε, an ally character as a pending display in the display pattern ε defeats an enemy character in active display area 135SG005A, and the active display is performed. Although we have exemplified a form in which the ally character that has become ``can be changed to an active display in display pattern β or display pattern γ, the present invention is not limited to this, and when displaying a pending display in display pattern ε, By defeating the enemy character while the pending display is being displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D, the friendly character serving as the pending display may be changed to the pending display of display pattern β or display pattern γ.

In addition, when displaying a pending display in display pattern ε, when a winning flash effect is executed at the same time, the display pattern ε is displayed at a higher rate than when a winning flash effect is not executed. may be changeable to a pending display (or an active display) of display pattern β or display pattern γ. By doing this, not only can the player's attention be drawn to the battle result between the friendly character and the enemy character as a pending display of the display pattern ε, but also the winning flash effect can be executed while the battle is being executed. Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether there is a player or not, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the modified example 135SG-5 and the modified example 135SG-6, the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε are added to the display patterns α to γ described in the feature section 135SG as display patterns for the hold display and the active display. , but when displaying a hold display or an active display using these display patterns δ or display pattern ε, it is the same as when displaying a hold display or an active display using display patterns α to display patterns γ. Then, specific display display start effect A or specific display display start effect B may be executed.

More specifically, when displaying a pending display or an active display in the display pattern δ, execute the specific display display start effect A (see Figure 40-19) in the same way as in the case of the display pattern α, and then display the pending display or active display. When displaying with display pattern ε, as in the case of display pattern β and display pattern γ, the specific display display start effect B (see Figure 40-20) or the period during which the display of pending display or active display is completed is specified. A specific display start effect that is longer than the display start effect A and shorter than the specific display start effect B may be executed. By doing this, when displaying a pending display or an active display in the display pattern δ or display pattern ε, similarly to the feature section 135SG, from a timing before the display of the pending display or active display is completed. , the player will be able to recognize the winning flash effect sound and the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F.

Further, in the feature section 135SG, as an example of a winning flash effect, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modification 135SG-7, the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 may be changeable in stages according to the progress of the winning flash effect.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 40-124 (A) and 40-124 (B), when the winning ( 40-124 (B), when a winning start (starting prize) occurs and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, as shown in Figure 40-124(B), the first winning flash The performance begins.

First, as shown in FIG. 40-124(B), as for the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning starts from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (V1>V2). , the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-125(C) and 40-125(D), display of the effect image 135SG005E is started from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5, and the winning flash Blinking control of the lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the cycle T1 is started. In the blinking control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the first period winning flash effect starts, as shown in Figure 40-125 (D), Figure 40-126 (E), and Figure 40-126 (F), as the above-mentioned specific display display start effect B. , An animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is controlled to blink, is displayed, and an animation in which the character A moves to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. After the character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed (if it is the main characteristic part 135SG, the fourth pending display is displayed). An animation that attacks (acts on) the position where the display is displayed is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending storage display area 135SG005D, the pending display that is the target of the winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) that is currently being executed appears gradually from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A acted. An appearance animation is displayed (see Figures 40-20 (D-1) to 40-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display whose appearance animation has been completed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display as a specific display rotating display effect like other pending displays.

When the first-term winning flash performance ends, the second-term winning flash performance starts from the ending timing. As for the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, as shown in FIG. 40-127 (G) and FIG. 40-127 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning starts from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2. , the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 (cycle T2>cycle T1), and the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blink at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 (FIG. 40- 27(A) to blinking in the manner shown in FIGS. 40-27(D)), the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals. Ru.

Note that the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the period T2 is in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image) A gradation using blue-based colors, a gradation using red-based colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.) is executed.

The cycle T2, which is the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-mentioned cycle T1, but shorter than the above-mentioned cycle T0 (lamp blinking cycle length: T0>T2). >T1). Incidentally, during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 40-128(I) and 40-128(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the transparent black image 135SG005B overlappingly displayed over the entire area of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIG. 40-128 (J), FIG. 40-129 (K), and FIG. 40-129 (L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the image display device 5 The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late winning in this modification 135SG-7 is executed regardless of whether or not it is the symbol confirmation period. That is, as shown in FIG. 40-128 (J), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R are When winning a prize, a sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at volume V2.

When the symbol confirmation period ends, a new variable display starts. At this time, in the image display device 5, the pending display displayed at the beginning in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D is moved to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display, and is also displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted to the right one by one. Furthermore, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is also started.

In addition, in this variable display, as shown in FIG. 40-129(K) and FIG. 40-129(L), the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed together with the black image 135SG005B on the image display device 5 is larger than the previous variable display. may be displayed. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S larger than the previous variable display in this way, the silhouette image is displayed in an overlapping manner in the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIG. 40-130(M) and FIG. 40-130(N), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the decorative symbol and the small symbol 135SG005M are displayed in the combination indicating a miss on the image display device 5. At the same time, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Even during the symbol confirmation period, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 40-130(N), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly. In particular, the silhouette image 135SG005S is also displayed overlappingly with the active display area 135SG005A. Further, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at a volume of V2.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, it is possible to display either of two silhouette images 135SG005S of different sizes as the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning, and a large-sized silhouette can be displayed. When the image 135SG005S is displayed, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A are displayed in an overlapping manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the large-sized silhouette image 135SG005S The active display area 135SG005A may be displayed in an overlapping manner only when the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect is executed. By doing this, the player can easily recognize the variable display corresponding to the flash effect when winning, and the active display area 135SG005A, that is, the active display corresponding to the flash effect when winning, is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S. Therefore, it is possible to provide surprise to the players and improve their interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, silhouette images 135SG005S of different sizes can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect when winning a prize, and depending on the size of the displayed silhouette image 135SG005S, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active Since the overlapping aspect with the display area 135SG005A is different, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, there are cases in which the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap and cases in which they do not overlap. , the present invention is not limited to this, but in the case where the overlapping area between the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, when the active display area 135SG005A A case where only a part of the area 135SG005A overlaps with the silhouette image 135SG005S, a case where the entire active display area 135SG005A overlaps with the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc.) may be provided.

Further, in the present modification example 135SG-7, depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, there is a case where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap. However, before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts, it overlaps with the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect that is displayed in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D. The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap with the active display displayed in the active display area 135SG005A, which is the target of the winning flash effect, while the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is being executed. A silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed. By doing this, the player can easily recognize the pending display and active display that correspond to the flash effect when winning a prize, and the silhouette image 135SG005S hides not only the pending display but also the active display. It is possible to improve the game's interest by adding even more surprise to the game.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-7, only one of the pending display and the active display is hidden by displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which both the pending display and the active display are hidden by the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning.

Further, in the present modification 135SG-7, a form is exemplified in which the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning can be displayed overlappingly in the active display area 135SG005A and the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D, but the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and in the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the winning flash effect as exemplified in the feature section 135SG, when the decorative pattern temporarily stops, The silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect when winning a prize may be displayed overlappingly on the special symbol (see FIGS. 40-40, etc.) that stops in the decorative symbol display area 5C. By doing this, the special symbol for notifying the temporary stop is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning, so it is possible to give surprise to the player and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, as a re-variable display effect of the present invention, a form in which the special symbol stops in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a re-variable display effect, an image different from the special symbol may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning may be displayed overlapping with this image.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, if a starting winning at the first starting opening occurs during execution of the super reach reach effect, execution of the winning flash effect based on the starting winning is not determined (determined to be non-executable). Although the present invention is not limited to this example, as a modified example 135SG-8, if a starting winning occurs in the first starting opening while the variable display is being executed, the variable display The remaining period may be specified, and if the specified period is less than the execution period of the winning flash effect in the previous period, execution of the winning flash effect may not be determined (determined not to be executed). By doing this, the winning flash effect (previous period winning flash effect) is executed when the remaining period of the variable display is shorter than the execution period of the previous winning flash effect. It is possible to prevent the specific display (pending display or active display) of the target of the performance from becoming difficult to understand.

In addition, in the present modification example 135SG-8, a mode is exemplified in which it is determined whether or not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning a prize based on the remaining period of the variable display and the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute the flash effect when winning a prize depends on the remaining period of the variable display and the period other than the execution period of the flash effect when winning the previous period (for example, a period of 5 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.) ) may be used as a criterion.

Furthermore, in this modification example 135SG-8, if a starting winning occurs at the first starting opening while the variable display is being executed, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period. Although the embodiment is exemplified in which the execution of the winning flash effect is not determined if the specified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the winning flash effect, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, it may be possible to perform a winning flash effect from the start timing of the next variable display, provided that the variable display result of the variable display is a loss. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the super reach reach effect and the winning flash effect from becoming less interesting due to the overlap of the super reach effect and the winning flash effect.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect is blinking at a brightness C1 and a cycle T1 (the light emitting mode in the previous winning flash effect), and a blinking mode with a brightness C2 and a cycle T2. There are two light emission modes: flashing (light emission mode in the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half). On the other hand, the light emission mode of the starting port lamp 135SG009S in the starting port lamp lighting effect includes blue light emission at a brightness C2 according to the display pattern β, and red light emission at a brightness C2 according to the display pattern γ. It is provided. In other words, the feature section 135SG exemplifies a form in which the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect is the same as the number of light emission modes of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-9, the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect and the light emission of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the starting lamp light emission effect are changed. The number of aspects may be different.

In particular, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-5, display patterns δ and display patterns ε are provided as display patterns for the hold display and active display, and these display patterns δ are used as the light emission mode of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission effect. By providing a light emitting mode according to the display pattern ε, the number of light emitting modes of the starting port lamp 135SG009S in the starting port lamp light emission effect can be set to be greater than the number of light emitting modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect. good. By doing this, the variation in the light emission of the starting port lamp 135SG009S increases, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the feature section 135SG, an example is given in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is made to emit light as a winning flash effect, and the starting gate lamp 135SG009S is made to emit light in a starting door lamp light emission effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-10, the light emitting area where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as a winning flash effect may be set larger than the light emitting area where the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S emits light as a starting exit lamp light emitting performance. good.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 40-28, in the case where it is decided to execute both the winning flash effect and the pending display notice effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is activated when the starting winning occurs. On the other hand, the starting gate lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the reach effect on the variable display that is the target of the starting prize winning flash effect, while the starting gate lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the reach effect on the variable display that is the target of the starting winning flash effect. Since the light is emitted until the end of the variable display (which is the target of the flash effect), by applying the modified example 135SG-10, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will emit light in accordance with the winning flash effect for an excessively long time. It is possible to maintain the player's expectation that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state by the light emitting mode of the starting port lamp 135SG009S while preventing a decrease in gaming interest due to the above.

In addition, in the characteristic part 135SG, a mode in which the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light without blinking is illustrated as the starting lamp lamp lighting effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starting lamp lamp 135SG009S is not limited to this. The mouth lamp 135SG009S may be blinked. Furthermore, when the starting port lamp 135SG009S is blinked as the starting port lamp light emission effect in this way, the blinking cycle of the starting port lamp 135SG009S is set to the blinking period (period T2) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect. It may be different. In this way, by making the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F different from the blinking cycle of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S, players pay attention to both the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 40-28, the feature section 135SG has a configuration in which the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, etc. are temporarily turned off when performing a flash effect upon winning. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-11, when performing a flash effect at the time of winning, the brightness of the backlight etc. built in the image display device 5 is The winning flash effect may be started after the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is lowered by lowering the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5. In this manner, when the winning flash effect is executed, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced to make it easier for the player to recognize the start of the winning flash effect.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-11, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced by reducing the brightness of the backlight etc. built into the image display device 5, that is, the image display Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the image display device 5 is changed to a low visibility state in which visibility is lower than the previous state by changing the brightness of the device 5, the present invention is not limited to this. Forms of reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the display device 5 include, in addition to reducing the 5 luminance (brightness) of the image display device, temporarily stopping the display of the image on the image display device 5; The movable body 32 is moved in front of the image display device 5, the image display device 5 itself is moved repeatedly in the vertical direction, etc., and the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is increased to relatively display the image on the image display device 5. It may also be something that reduces the visibility of the image being displayed.

In other words, a "low visibility state" in the present invention is a state in which the visibility on the image display device 5 is lower than the immediately previous state, and is defined as a state in which the visibility on the image display device 5 is lowered than the previous state. Contains images that reduce visibility.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 40-28, when it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning in response to a starting winning, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is started from the speakers 8L and 8R. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started after the winning flash is started.As a modified example 135SG-12, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts flashing in response to the starting winning. If it is decided to execute, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display is completed. It's okay. By doing this, it is possible for the player to quickly recognize that a starting winning has occurred and that the execution of the winning flash effect has been decided by the blinking (light emission) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. You can improve your interest in gaming.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-12, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display is completed. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a hold display is displayed. An appearance animation of the active display may be started.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 40-28, during the execution period of the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period, the speakers 8L and 8R output the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning at the volume V1, The lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the period T1, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period, the volume of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R is executed. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the output at V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed, the present invention is limited to this. Rather, as a modified example 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the second term, when the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning the award is started, it is the same as during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term. , Outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect by the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C1 and cycle T1, and temporarily displaying the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5. You may. By doing this, even during the execution period of the flash performance when winning a prize in the second half, the sound corresponding to the flash performance when winning a prize is output at the volume V1 from speakers 8L and 8R, as in the flash performance when winning a prize in the first half, and the sound for the flash performance when winning a prize is output at volume V1. By flashing the lamp 135SG009F at a brightness C1 and a cycle T1 and displaying the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5, the player recognizes that the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect will start. Since it is easy to play, it can improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the second period winning flash effect, when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started, the same as during the execution period of the first period winning flash effect, The speakers 8L and 8R temporarily output the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1, the flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the cycle T1 at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started during the execution period of the winning flash effect in the later period, the winning time flash effect by the speakers 8L and 8R is Execute only one or two of the following: outputting a sound compatible with flash effects at volume V1, blinking flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C1 and period T1 when winning a prize, and displaying effect image 135SG005E on image display device 5. You can do it like this.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 of this specification has a jackpot probability that differs depending on the set value (FIGS. 31 to 39), and a pending display notice effect and a flash effect at the time of winning based on the starting winning. It is executable and the lighting mode changes as a winning flash effect depending on the lamp (characteristic section 135SG, Figures 40-1 to 40-68), and during the winning pattern determination period, the winning flash effect is executable. (Modified Example 135SG-1, Figures 40-69 to 40-89), it is possible to perform super reach reach performances with different jackpot expectations, and the movable body movement is performed before the reach production with high jackpot expectations. If the performance can be executed and the movable body movement performance is executed, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the start timing of the movable body movement performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement performance. (Modification 2, Figures 40-90 to 40-107), the step-up effect can be executed during variable display, and if the step-up effect is executed when the winning flash effect is not executed, the winning flash While the lamp 135SG009F for the winning flash emits light in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect, if the step-up effect is executed while the winning flash effect is being executed, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed to the winning flash effect. One that does not change from the corresponding light emission mode (Modified Example 135SG-3, Figures 40-108 to 40-118), it is possible to perform a movable body movement performance before the start of the Super Reach reach performance, and the flash lamp when winning a prize. When the light emitting mode of 135SG009F changes from the light emitting mode according to the flash effect when winning a prize to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect from the start timing of the movable body movement effect, and from the start timing of the reach effect to the light emitting mode according to the reach effect. The jackpot expectation level differs depending on the lighting mode (Modification 135SG-4, Figure 40-119), display patterns α to display patterns ε are provided as display modes for pending display and active display. The rate of which display pattern is determined as the display pattern of the pending display or the active display is different depending on the execution of the winning flash effect due to winning a prize (Modification 135SG-5, Figure 40- 120), when the display pattern ε is determined as the display pattern of the hold display, the display pattern ε changes to any of the display patterns α to γ according to the execution of the action effect (Modification 135SG- 6, Fig. 40-121 to Fig. 40-123), the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes according to the progress of the flash effect at the time of winning (Modification 135SG-7, Fig. 40-124 to 40-130), etc., but the pachinko game machine of the present invention may be implemented by combining two or more of these plurality of characteristic parts and modifications. good.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as a game machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game machine that plays a predetermined game is defined as a game machine that plays at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, it may be a slot machine or a general game machine as long as it performs the following.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 11 Main board 12 Performance control board 103 CPU
120 CPU for performance control
200 Dispensing device 202 First guide passage forming part 201 Ball tank forming part 203 First passage forming body 210 Terminal board 220 Cover bodies 271A to 271H Holes 314, 324, 334 Cover part 340 Ball stopper members N1 to 6, 11 to 16 screw member

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a starting area;
A light emitting means capable of emitting light;
a display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
Effect execution means capable of executing a specific display effect of displaying the specific display and a specific light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on a predetermined condition being satisfied;
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming part having an open top surface and forming a guide passage for guiding game media in the storage part to the payout part;
a screw drop restriction portion provided to cover the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion;
Equipped with
The specific display can be displayed based on the game media paid out from the payout unit entering the starting area,
The screw fall restriction section prevents the game medium that has fallen onto the screw fall restriction section from staying therein, and prevents the screw member that has fallen onto the screw fall restriction section from falling into the guide path forming section. The screw member is formed so as to be able to stay on the restricting portion and to be able to lock a screw member that has fallen onto the screw fall restricting portion, but not to lock a game medium that has fallen onto the screw falling restricting portion. having a hole,
The performance execution means executes the specific light emission performance so that the light emission of the light emission unit becomes recognizable to the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display performance,
The light emitting means performs the specific light emitting effect during a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing and a second period from the predetermined timing to a specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect. A gaming machine that emits light in a corresponding manner .

Images